Vibrant Spring Recipes - ProperFoodie https://properfoodie.com/spring-recipes/ Nutritious and full flavoured recipes Fri, 07 Oct 2022 15:03:20 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.4.4 https://properfoodie.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/square-logo-96x96.png Vibrant Spring Recipes - ProperFoodie https://properfoodie.com/spring-recipes/ 32 32 Sweet and Sour Chicken https://properfoodie.com/sweet-and-sour-chicken/ https://properfoodie.com/sweet-and-sour-chicken/#comments Tue, 10 Sep 2019 18:09:10 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11020 This easy recipe for sweet and sour chicken is made with a delicious sweet and sour plum sauce, healthy stir fried vegetables and slices of fresh, juicy plums. If you prefer your sweet and sour chicken without pineapple then this plum chicken recipe is definitely worth a try!! 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe A super...

Read More

The post Sweet and Sour Chicken appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
This easy recipe for sweet and sour chicken is made with a delicious sweet and sour plum sauce, healthy stir fried vegetables and slices of fresh, juicy plums. If you prefer your sweet and sour chicken without pineapple then this plum chicken recipe is definitely worth a try!!

Sweet and sour chicken in a large pan topped with spring onions and chilli flakes.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

A super easy, no fuss recipe thats perfect any night of the week. This sweet and sour chicken can be on the table in just 30 minutes and many of the ingredients can be changed to suit different tastes.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough sweet and sour chicken to serve 2 people (or 4 starter-sized portions):

For the sweet and sour plum sauce:

  • 2 tablespoon Tomato ketchup
  • 2 tablespoon Plum sauce (shop bought)
  • 1 tablespoon Honey
  • 2 tablespoon Sweet chilli sauce
  • 1 tablespoon Rice vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon Soy sauce

For the sweet and sour chicken:

  • ½ tablespoon oil
  • 1 Clove garlic finely chopped
  • 2 Chicken breasts cubed (400g)
  • 1 Yellow bell pepper (150g)
  • 1 Red bell pepper (150g)
  • 2 Medium tomatoes roughly chopped (150g)
  • 100g plums stones removed and quartered
  • 3 Spring onions - green parts sliced (optional)
  • Sprinkle of chilli flakes (optional)

Ingredient notes

Measurements: See the recipe card below for full ingredients and instructions. Also, use the toggle button to switch between metric and USA measurements.

Chicken: Swap in for your preferred meat; try sweet and sour pork or hot and sour fish soup made with prawns and noodles.

Plums: For a more traditional version swap the plums for pineapple.

Vegetables: Add more vegetables or swap for different ones like carrots and onions. For a vegetarian sweet and sour recipe, leave out the meat and bulk up with extra veg; try with baby corn and chunks of courgette.

Toppings: Spring onions and chilli flakes are optional,. You could also try topping with sesame seeds or chopped cashew nuts.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Make the sweet and sour sauce by mixing together tomato ketchup, plum sauce, honey, sweet chilli sauce, rice vinegar and soy sauce.
  2. In a large pan fry off the chicken, peppers and tomatoes
  3. Add chopped, fresh plums to the pan then pour over the sweet and sour sauce.
  4. Simmer then serve topped with chilli flakes and chopped spring onions.
Four images showing how to make sweet and sour chicken steps 1 to 4.

💭 Expert tips

Fruit: To keep the fruit chunky in the finished dish make sure to add the plums (or other preferred fruit) just before the sauce. This will allow the fruit to be heated but still maintain its shape. Over cooking will cause the fruit to soften and even dissolve into the sauce.  

Simmering: Simmer the dish gently and until just warmed through before serving. Over heating or boiling will ruin the sauce.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What is sweet and sour sauce made of?

For a dish that is similar to that in Western Chinese restaurants, the sauce is usually made with vinegar, tomato ketchup and soy sauce. For this recipe I also included a couple of tablespoons of jarred plum sauce to add to the sweetness and enhance the flavour of the fresh plums.

How to make Hong Kong sweet and sour?

For a sweet and sour chicken that is Hong Kong style you will just need to alter the way the chicken is cooked. In this recipe the chicken is stir fried in a little oil. Hong Kong sweet and sour chicken uses crispy chicken made by coating the raw chicken in a batter or in breadcrumbs and then deep frying until golden.

How to store?

Store in an air tight container for up to 3 days in the fridge or 3 months on the freezer. Make sure the dish is fully cooled before storing in the fridge or freezer. When reheating make sure the sweet and sour chicken is thoroughly defrosted first and then heat through in a large pan or wok until piping hot.

Sweet and sour chicken in a bowl topped with spring onions and chilli flakes.

Plums leftover? Try them in a delicious Plum and rhubarb crumble.

🍱 Other Asian recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

This post was first published in September 2019. Updated in October 2022 with an improved images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

 

📖 Recipe

Sweet and sour chicken in a large pan topped with spring onions and chilli flakes.
Print

Sweet and Sour Chicken Recipe

This easy recipe for sweet and sour chicken is made with a delicious sweet and sour plum sauce, healthy stir fried vegetables and slices of fresh, juicy plums. If you prefer your sweet and sour chicken without pineapple then this plum chicken recipe is definitely worth a try!!
Course Dinner, main meal
Cuisine Asian, Chinese
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 467kcal

Ingredients

For the sweet and sour sauce

  • 2 tablespoon Tomato Ketchup
  • 2 tablespoon Plum sauce
  • 1 tablespoon Honey
  • 2 tablespoon Sweet chilli sauce
  • 1 tablespoon Rice vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon Soy sauce

For the plum chicken:

  • ½ tablespoon oil
  • 1 Clove garlic finely chopped
  • 2 Chicken breasts cubed 400g
  • 1 Yellow bell pepper 150g
  • 1 Red bell pepper 150g
  • 2 Medium tomatoes roughly chopped 150g
  • 100 g plums stones removed and quartered

For the toppings:

  • 3 Spring onions sliced optional
  • Sprinkle of chilli flakes optional

To serve:

  • Rice optional

Instructions

To make the sweet and sour sauce:

  • In a small bowl mix together tomato ketchup, plum sauce, honey, sweet chilli sauce, rice vinegar and soy sauce. Stir together well then put to one side.
    2 tablespoon Tomato Ketchup, 2 tablespoon Plum sauce, 1 tablespoon Honey, 2 tablespoon Sweet chilli sauce, 1 tablespoon Rice vinegar, 1 tablespoon Soy sauce

To make the sweet and sour chicken:

  • Place a large pan or wok on a medium heat and add ½ tablespoon oil. When the oil is hot add the garlic and cubed raw chicken. Cook for 3-4 minutes or until browned all over.
    ½ tablespoon oil, 1 Clove garlic finely chopped, 2 Chicken breasts cubed
  • Keeping the pan on a medium heat add the red peppers, yellow peppers and tomatoes to the chicken. Stir fry for a couple of minutes until the vegetables start to go soft and the chicken is cooked through.
    1 Yellow bell pepper, 1 Red bell pepper, 2 Medium tomatoes roughly chopped
  • Next add the freshly sliced plums and the sweet and sour sauce made earlier. Mix together well and bring to a gentle simmer. Simmer for a minute or so until heated through.
    100 g plums
  • Serve up in bowls (with rice if desired) and top with sliced spring onions and chilli flakes.
    3 Spring onions sliced, Sprinkle of chilli flakes, Rice

Video

Notes

Chicken: Swap in for your preferred meat; try sweet and sour pork or hot and sour fish soup made with prawns and noodles.
Plums: For a more traditional version swap the plums for pineapple.
Vegetables: Add more vegetables or swap for different ones like carrots and onions. For a vegetarian sweet and sour recipe, leave out the meat and bulk up with extra veg; try with baby corn and chunks of courgette.
Fruit: To keep the fruit chunky in the finished dish make sure to add the plums (or other preferred fruit) just before the sauce. This will allow the fruit to be heated but still maintain its shape. Over cooking will cause the fruit to soften and even dissolve into the sauce.
Toppings: Spring onions and chilli flakes are optional,. You could also try topping with sesame seeds or chopped cashew nuts.    
Simmering: Simmer the dish gently and until just warmed through before serving. Over heating or boiling will ruin the sauce.
What is sweet and sour sauce made of? For a dish that is similar to that in Western Chinese restaurants, the sauce is usually made with vinegar, tomato ketchup and soy sauce. For this recipe I also included a couple of tablespoons of jarred plum sauce to add to the sweetness and enhance the flavour of the fresh plums.
How to make Hong Kong sweet and sour? For a sweet and sour chicken that is Hong Kong style you will just need to alter the way the chicken is cooked. In this recipe the chicken is stir fried in a little oil. Hong Kong sweet and sour chicken uses crispy chicken made by coating the raw chicken in a batter or in breadcrumbs and then deep frying until golden.
How to store? Store in an air tight container for up to 3 days in the fridge or 3 months on the freezer. Make sure the dish is fully cooled before storing in the fridge or freezer. When reheating make sure the sweet and sour chicken is thoroughly defrosted first and then heat through in a large pan or wok until piping hot.

Nutrition

Serving: 500g | Calories: 467kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 47g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.04g | Cholesterol: 128mg | Sodium: 1155mg | Potassium: 1485mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 31g | Vitamin A: 3620IU | Vitamin C: 256mg | Calcium: 57mg | Iron: 3mg
Sweet and sour chicken in a large pan topped with spring onions and chilli flakes.

The post Sweet and Sour Chicken appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/sweet-and-sour-chicken/feed/ 1
Mango Salsa Recipe https://properfoodie.com/mango-avocado-salad/ https://properfoodie.com/mango-avocado-salad/#respond Sat, 17 Sep 2022 19:05:42 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9031 A refreshing mango salsa recipe, great served on its own or loaded on tortilla chips. Made with chunks of avocado, fiery red chilli and a good handful of fresh coriander. A perfect Caribbean starter or side dish and especially great with anything spicy.  👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Mango salsa is a great recipe for...

Read More

The post Mango Salsa Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A refreshing mango salsa recipe, great served on its own or loaded on tortilla chips. Made with chunks of avocado, fiery red chilli and a good handful of fresh coriander. A perfect Caribbean starter or side dish and especially great with anything spicy. 

Bowl of mango salsa with some being scooped out on a tortilla crisp.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Mango salsa is a great recipe for a healthy starter or refreshing side dish. Its easy to prepare and perfect for a make ahead appetiser. Best served cold; toss in lime juice to keep the salsa at its freshest and then chill in the fridge.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough mango salsa to serve 6 people:

Ingredients for making mango salsa.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Limes: Lime juice is essential in the recipe for keeping everything fresh and vibrant. The acidic lime prevents oxidation and browning of the chopped avocado. If you can't get hold of limes you can also use lemon juice.

Avocados and mangos: Use ripe avocados and mangos that feel soft but not squishy.

Chilli: Optional.

Coriander (cilantro): Also optional and could be replaced with freshly chopped parsley.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Finely dice the red onion and mix in a large bowl with the juice of one lime.
  2. Add finely chopped chilli and diced mango and avocado to the red onion. Add the juice of a second lime and toss everything together well.
  3. Season with salt and pepper (to taste).
  4. Garnish with freshly chopped coriander (cilantro).
How to make mango salsa step by step

💭 Expert tips

  • At the start of the mango salsa recipe add juice of one lime to the chopped red onion and leave to soak for a minute or two. This will help to take the harsh bite out of the raw onion flavour.
  • Add the rest of the lime juice to the chopped avocado and mango to help keep it fresh and to stop the browning process.
  • Sprinkle the coriander over the top as a garnish or for a more even finish and taste stir well into the finished salsa dish.
  • Mango and avocado salsa is a dish I like to make in advance as the mango and avocado chopping can be a bit messy. However, if you don't mind a bit salad prep just before dinner or even once your guests have arrived then this is quite an easy recipe to knock together from scratch. For more salad ideas why not try my Vietnamese style beef salad, Italian pasta salad, roasted cauliflower salad.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can you make this recipe ahead of time?

Yes, this easy mango salsa recipe can be made up to one day ahead of time. Make sure to mix in plenty of lime juice to keep all the ingredients fresh, then store in the fridge until ready to serve.

Is this recipe healthy?

This recipe is bursting at the seams with nutrients; from the monounsaturated fats in the avocado to all the fibre and vitamins in the mango, lime and chilli. - Its really not just a pretty dish.

Bowl of mango and avocado salsa.

🥗 Other starter recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Bowl of mango salsa with some being scooped out on a tortilla crisp.
Print

Mango Salsa Recipe

A refreshing mango salsa recipe, great served on its own or loaded on tortilla chips. Made with chunks of avocado, fiery red chilli and a good handful of fresh coriander. A perfect Caribbean starter or side dish and especially great with anything spicy. 
Course Appetizer, lunch, Salad, Side Dish, starter
Cuisine cuban, Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Low Calorie, Low Fat, Low Lactose, Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 43kcal

Equipment

  • Sharp knife
  • chopping board
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Large spoon
  • Serving bowl and spoon

Ingredients

  • 1 red onion finely chopped
  • 2 limes juiced
  • 1 chilli deseeded and finely chopped
  • 2 mangoes peeled and chopped
  • 1 avocado peeled and chopped
  • Salt and pepper to taste
  • Handful of fresh coriander (cilantro) roughly chopped

Instructions

  • Finely dice the red onion and mix in a large bowl with the juice of one lime.
    1 red onion, 2 limes
  • Add finely chopped chilli and diced mango and avocado to the red onion. Add the juice of a second lime and toss everything together well.
    2 mangoes, 1 avocado, 1 chilli, 2 limes
  • Season with salt and pepper (to taste).
    Salt and pepper
  • Garnish with freshly chopped coriander.
    Handful of fresh coriander (cilantro)

Notes

Limes: Lime juice is essential in the recipe for keeping everything fresh and vibrant. The acidic lime prevents oxidation and browning of the chopped avocado. If you can't get hold of limes you can also use lemon juice.
Avocados and mangos: Use ripe avocados and mangos that feel soft but not squishy.
Chilli: Optional.
Coriander (cilantro): Also optional and could be replaced with freshly chopped parsley.
Can you make this recipe ahead of time? Yes, this easy mango salsa recipe can be made up to one day ahead of time. Make sure to mix in plenty of lime juice to keep all the ingredients fresh, then store in the fridge until ready to serve.
Is this recipe healthy? This recipe is bursting at the seams with nutrients; from the monounsaturated fats in the avocado to all the fibre and vitamins in the mango, lime and chilli. - Its really not just a pretty dish.
Expert tips:
  • At the start of the mango salsa recipe add juice of one lime to the chopped red onion and leave to soak for a minute or two. This will help to take the harsh bite out of the raw onion flavour.
  • Add the rest of the lime juice to the chopped avocado and mango to help keep it fresh and to stop the browning process.
  • Sprinkle the coriander over the top as a garnish or for a more even finish and taste stir well into the finished salsa dish.

Nutrition

Serving: 75g | Calories: 43kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 9mg | Potassium: 140mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 438IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 0.2mg

This post was first published in Nov 2016. Updated in Sept 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips. 

The post Mango Salsa Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/mango-avocado-salad/feed/ 0
5 Easy Recipes For Pancakes https://properfoodie.com/easy-recipes-for-pancakes/ https://properfoodie.com/easy-recipes-for-pancakes/#respond Mon, 28 Feb 2022 22:42:33 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=18690 These 5 easy recipes for pancakes are the perfect inspiration for pancake day. This easy guide to making pancakes will show you how to make 5 different types of delicious pancakes. Plus, keep reading to find the answers to the usual questions asked about making pancakes and get my best tips and tricks for the...

Read More

The post 5 Easy Recipes For Pancakes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
These 5 easy recipes for pancakes are the perfect inspiration for pancake day. This easy guide to making pancakes will show you how to make 5 different types of delicious pancakes. Plus, keep reading to find the answers to the usual questions asked about making pancakes and get my best tips and tricks for the perfect pancake.

Collage of 5 images showing 5 different ways to make pancakes.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

English Pancakes Recipe

This traditional English pancakes recipe is a great option for pancake day and is made simply with eggs, flour and milk (no baking powder required). The batter can be made in just 5 minutes and the recipe for this ensures a super smooth batter every time. Follow the link below for the full recipe and enjoy perfectly thin and light, English style pancakes on Pancake Tuesday.

English Pancakes Recipe
Traditional English pancakes with lemon and sugar.
Make this recipe
A plate of this flat pancakes stacked with the top four folded twice topped with a lemon wedge and a second wedge being squeezed over the top.

American Pancakes Recipe

Thick, soft and spongy American pancakes that can be made at home using basic store cupboard ingredients. It takes just 15 minute to mix together the pancake batter and 10 minutes to cook off a full batch in the frying pan. Unlike the British pancake, American style pancakes are small and stackable and have a thick spongy texture that is perfect for soaking up lashing of syrup. Make your own stack for a special breakfast, for pancake day or even for a dessert.

American Pancakes
Easy to make, light and fluffy American Pancakes.
Make this recipe
A stack of American pancakes with a piece of butter melting on the top and syrup poured over and drizzling down one side.

Blueberry Pancakes Recipe

Easy blueberry pancakes recipe filled with warm, juicy blueberries and topped with melted butter and thick golden syrup. Make a stack of these light and fluffy Blueberry Pancakes in just 25 minutes.

American Blueberry Pancakes
Make your own deliciously light and fluffy Blueberry Pancakes with this easy step by step recipe.
Make this recipe
Stack of American style blueberry pancakes with a piece of butter on top and syrup being poured over

Scotch Pancakes Recipe (Drop Scones)

These soft and sweet scotch pancakes are perfect for breakfast, hot and dripping with butter. Make up a batch at the start of the week and then pop a couple in the toaster to warm for your breakfast each day. This recipe is really easy and requires just 5 minutes to whisk together the batter.

Scotch Pancakes Recipe (Drop Scones)
Fluffy and light scotch pancakes recipe made with self raising flour, sugar, milk and 1 egg.
Make this recipe
A tall stack of scotch pancakes on a plate with melted butter on top and honey being drizzled over with a wooden honey dipper.

Healthy Banana Pancakes Recipe

This healthy pancakes recipe is made with bananas, oats and eggs and is great alternative for pancake day if you need flourless pancakes, milk-free pancakes or just a generally stodge-free pancake. These pancakes are soft, naturally sweetened, healthy and nutritious! Serve up with extra banana to ensure you are getting in 1 of your 5 day and add a drizzle of honey to make them all the more tempting.

Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats)
Make this nutritious pancake batter in just 5 minutes and enjoy warm and healthy banana pancakes straight from the pan.
Make this recipe
A stack of banana pancakes on a plate topped with slices of banana and a line of honey being poured over from above.

Recipe for Pancakes - Frequently asked questions

How thick or thin should pancake batter be?

For the English pancakes recipe the batter should be thin and similar to the consistency of single cream.

The batter for American pancakes, blueberry pancakes and scotch pancakes is much thicker than crepe or English pancake batter. It should hold together to form a thicker pancake and not run over the surface of the pan.

Why shouldn’t you over mix pancake batter?

Over mixing pancake batter can cause too much gluten to form, which leads to chewy pancakes. Mix the batter until everything is just about combined. 

Some of the recipes above suggest best ways to combine the ingredients so as to avoid lumpy batter. However, if you do get lumps in your batter, don’t keep mixing. Instead leave it to rest in the fridge for 15-30 minutes. This will allow most of the lumps to dissolve.

How do you know when pancake batter is ready?

The pancake batter will be ready once all the ingredients have been combined and if necessary it has had time to rest and dissolve any lumps.

How to make fluffy American pancakes?

Fluffy American pancakes are made by adding a rising agent such as baking powder. An acidic liquid such as yogurt or buttermilk helps to activate baking powder so ensuring a good rise. Extra fluffy pancakes can be made by folding whipped egg whites into the pancake batter.

When is the pan is hot enough to start making pancakes?

Once the pan has been on the heat for a couple of minutes, spread oil or melted butter over the surface. You can then test if the pan is ready by adding a small amount of batter. Flip after 30 seconds and the batter should have started to go golden brown. This is a good indication that the pan is ready. 

Recipes for Pancakes - Tips and tricks

How to stop pancakes sticking to the pan

If your pancakes are sticking to the pan then you need to add more oil or butter and spread it evenly around the whole surface. I usually melt a bit of butter and then use kitchen towel to spread it around and remove any excess.

When to flip pancakes

For English pancakes its time to flip when you can shake the pan and the pancake loosens and starts to slide over the surface of the pan.

The indication that its time to flip American pancakes is when bubbles begin to appear on the surface of the batter. However, if your pan isn't hot enough the bubbles may not form and the pancake won't cook properly.

Be aware that the healthy banana pancakes brown a lot quicker than standard pancakes. To help with this make sure the pan is well buttered or oiled before adding the batter and keep the heat low-medium. Also, use a spatula to carefully check the underside of the pancake regularly before flipping.

Handle banana pancakes with care when flipping over as they can be quite delicate.

Keeping pancakes warm

For all of these recipes for pancakes, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes. Alternatively pop the pan back on the heat and warm each pancake on both sides for 10 seconds or so.

Best toppings for pancakes

The traditional topping for English pancakes is sugar and lemon - nice and simple. However, you could also top with strawberries, mango, banana, nutella, honey, syrup, chocolate sauce, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

The most simple topping for American style pancakes is butter and maple syrup. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Maple syrup could also be replaced with golden syrup or honey.

For extra flavour and texture in American pancakes mix fruit, spices, chocolate chips or spread into the pancake batter.

Scotch pancakes are best served hot with a good helping of butter spread on the top

Serve up healthy banana pancakes with extra fruit and a drizzle of honey

Equipment you'll need for making pancakes

  • Sieve
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Whisk
  • 9 inch pancake pan or frying pan
  • Ladle
  • Spatula

Difference between English pancakes and crepes?

In the UK, English pancakes are traditionally eaten on Shrove Tuesday at the start of lent (and hardly any other time). The french version of pancakes (crepes) are very similar to British pancakes except they are larger, thinner and eaten as a dessert at any time. A special tool is used for spreading the batter on a hot plate, which makes crepes very thin.

Difference between American Pancakes and English Pancakes?

Unlike English pancakes, American pancakes use a leavening agent (baking powder), which release gases and allow the pancakes to rise. Therefore, American pancakes are smaller and thicker than English pancakes.

Happy pancake flipping!!

The post 5 Easy Recipes For Pancakes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/easy-recipes-for-pancakes/feed/ 0
Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats) https://properfoodie.com/healthy-pancakes-recipe/ https://properfoodie.com/healthy-pancakes-recipe/#respond Sat, 06 Feb 2021 18:48:51 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=17031 Healthy pancakes recipe made with bananas & oats for a flourless & milk free pancake alternative. Make the pancake batter in just 5 minutes and enjoy warm and healthy banana pancakes straight from the pan. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe If you are looking...

Read More

The post Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Healthy pancakes recipe made with bananas & oats for a flourless & milk free pancake alternative. Make the pancake batter in just 5 minutes and enjoy warm and healthy banana pancakes straight from the pan. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes.

A stack of banana pancakes on a plate topped with slices of banana and a line of honey being poured over from honey dipper.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

If you are looking for a flourless and milk free option for Pancake day then this is your recipe. These soft and naturally sweetened, healthy pancakes are packed with banana and oats and are held together with eggs. A lovely nutritious alternative to the usual stodgy pancake. Serve up with extra banana to ensure you are getting in 1 of your 5 day and add a drizzle of honey to make them all the more tempting.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this healthy pancakes recipe at home you will need:

Ingredients needed to make healthy banana pancakes.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Rolled oats: Use rolled oats or porridge oats which will absorb and soften up quicker than whole oats. If you are making gluten free pancakes, double check the label of the oats for gluten.

Bananas: Make sure to use ripe bananas or even bananas with skin that has browned slightly. Under ripe bananas will be less sweet and more difficult to mash.

Baking powder: Baking powder helps the pancakes to rise during cooking so making them light and fluffy. If you are making gluten free pancakes, double check the label on your baking powder and make sure it doesn't contain gluten.

Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan, then wiping with a kitchen towel, so spreading the butter and removing any excess. Not using any butter or oil will mean the banana pancakes will burn easily or at the very least will go very dark brown during cooking.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Peel and roughly chop the bananas and place in a large bowl.
  2. Use a fork or masher to mash up the bananas.
  3. Add the eggs, oats, ground almonds and baking powder to the bowl.
  4. Whisk everything together into a batter. The batter will have a more lumpy consistency compared to normal pancake batter, due to the oats and banana. These lumps will soften and blend during cooking.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Leave the batter to stand for 5 minutes to allow the oats to completely soften.
  6. Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a low-medium heat scoop one heaped tablespoon into the pan and spread into a small circle shape with the back of the spoon. This pancake batter isn't as forgiving as usual batter and will need a little help to spread into a nice shape.
  7. Cook for around 1 minute, keeping the heat low-medium. Gently lift one edge with a spatula to check how its cooking. Be aware that banana pancakes are more delicate than normal pancakes and brown a lot quicker.
  8. Flip the pancake carefully using a spatula when it just starts to turn a golden brown underneath. Cook on the second side for a further 30 seconds or until golden brown. Don't be tempted to try and toss these pancakes!Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this recipe for steps 5-8.
  9. Repeat steps 6-8 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil. Or eat as you cook and serve with extra sliced banana and a drizzle of honey.

💭 Expert tips

  • During cooking, banana pancakes brown a lot quicker than standard pancakes. To help with this make sure the pan is well buttered or oiled before adding the batter and keep the heat low-medium. Also, use a spatula to carefully check the underside of the pancake regularly before flipping.
  • Handle these pancakes with care when flipping over as they can be quite delicate.
  • For extra flavour and texture mix dried fruit, spices, chocolate chips or spread into the pancake batter.
  • Once the batter is mixed leave to stand for 5 minutes, or a bit longer if you have time, to allow the oats to fully soften.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What toppings to serve with banana pancakes?

The most simple topping for banana pancakes is more banana and a drizzle of honey. However, these healthy pancakes are great on their own. The banana ensures a moisture texture and naturally sweet flavour.

Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

Can you reheat these pancakes?

In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan. However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes or pop each pancake in the toaster until warm.

Are these healthy pancakes gluten free?

These healthy pancakes are gluten free but do contain oats and baking powder. In some instances oats and baking powder can contain gluten. Make sure to use gluten free baking powder and always check the labels of the oats and baking powder. Oats are naturally gluten free but can contain traces of gluten if they are produced in the same place as other gluten containing cereals.

Can these pancakes be frozen?

Once made, allow to fully cool then place in a sealed container and freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost and reheat all in one go in either the microwave or toaster until warmed through.

Stack of banana pancakes topped with sliced bananas, and with a wedge skewered and cut out from one side of the pancake stack and put to the side.

🥞 Other Pancake recipes

🍌 Other Banana recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A stack of banana pancakes on a plate topped with slices of banana and a line of honey being poured over from above.
Print

Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats)

Healthy pancakes recipe made with bananas and oats for a flourless and milk free pancake alternative. Make the pancake batter in just 5 minutes and enjoy warm and healthy banana pancakes straight from the pan.
Course afternoon tea, Breakfast, brunch, Dessert
Cuisine British
Diet Gluten Free, Low Fat, Low Lactose
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 8 Pancakes
Calories 71kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Fork or masher
  • Whisk
  • Frying pan
  • Large spoon or tablespoon
  • Spatula

Ingredients

  • 2 medium bananas
  • 2 large eggs
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • 1 tablespoon ground almonds
  • 50 g rolled oats or porridge oats
  • knob of Butter for cooking

Instructions

  • Peel and roughly chop the bananas and place in a large bowl.
  • Use a fork or masher to mash up the bananas.
  • Add the eggs, oats, ground almonds and baking powder to the bowl.
  • Whisk everything together into a batter. The batter will have a more lumpy consistency compared to normal pancake batter, due to the oats and banana. These lumps will soften and blend during cooking.
  • Leave the batter to stand for 5 minutes to allow the oats to completely soften.
  • Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a low-medium heat, scoop one heaped tablespoon into the pan and spread into a small circle shape with the back of the spoon. This pancake batter isn't as forgiving as usual batter and will need a little help to spread into a nice shape.
  • Cook for around 1 minute, keeping the heat low-medium. Gently lift one edge with a spatula to check how its cooking. Be aware that banana pancakes are more delicate than normal pancakes and brown a lot quicker.
  • Flip the pancake carefully using a spatula when it just starts to turn a golden brown underneath. Cook on the second side for a further 30 seconds or until golden brown. Don't be tempted to try and toss these pancakes!
  • Repeat steps 6-8 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil. Or eat as you cook and serve with extra sliced banana and a drizzle of honey.

Notes

Rolled oats: Use rolled oats or porridge oats which will absorb and soften up quicker than whole oats. If you are making gluten free pancakes, double check the label of the oats for gluten.
Bananas: Make sure to use ripe bananas or even bananas with skin that has browned slightly. Under ripe bananas will be less sweet and more difficult to mash.
Baking powder: Baking powder helps the pancakes to rise during cooking so making them light and fluffy. If you are making gluten free pancakes, double check the label on your baking powder and make sure it doesn't contain gluten.
Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan, then wiping with a kitchen towel, so spreading the butter and removing any excess. Not using any butter or oil will mean the banana pancakes will burn easily or at the very least will go very dark brown during cooking.
Toppings: Sliced banana and a drizzle of honey for a simple topping. Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.
Can you reheat these pancakes? In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan. However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes or pop each pancake in the toaster until warm.
Are these healthy pancakes gluten free? These healthy pancakes are gluten free but do contain oats and baking powder. In some instances oats and baking powder can contain gluten. Make sure to use gluten free baking powder and always check the labels of the oats and baking powder. Oats are naturally gluten free but can contain traces of gluten if they are produced in the same place as other gluten containing cereals.
Expert tips:
  • During cooking, banana pancakes brown a lot quicker than standard pancakes. To help with this make sure the pan is well buttered or oiled before adding the batter and keep the heat low-medium. Also, use a spatula to carefully check the underside of the pancake regularly before flipping.
  • Handle these pancakes with care when flipping over as they can be quite delicate.
  • For extra flavour and texture mix dried fruit, spices, chocolate chips or spread into the pancake batter.
  • Once the batter is mixed leave to stand for 5 minutes, or a bit longer if you have time, to allow the oats to fully soften.

Nutrition

Calories: 71kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 69mg | Potassium: 144mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 78IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 42mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/healthy-pancakes-recipe/feed/ 0
Pea and Ham Soup https://properfoodie.com/pea-and-ham-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/pea-and-ham-soup/#comments Sun, 13 Feb 2022 23:14:02 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=7051 Quick and easy pea and ham soup, made with fresh or frozen peas and your favourite choice of ham. A filling and nutritious midweek meal or easy starter for your next dinner party, ready in just 15 minutes. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe For a quick and easy, family friendly meal this recipe is up...

Read More

The post Pea and Ham Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Quick and easy pea and ham soup, made with fresh or frozen peas and your favourite choice of ham. A filling and nutritious midweek meal or easy starter for your next dinner party, ready in just 15 minutes.

Pea and ham soup in a bowl topped with creme fraiche, chunks of ham and fresh mint
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

For a quick and easy, family friendly meal this recipe is up there with some of the best. Its quick, nutritious, and everyone gets a good helping of greens. Its also great for using up any leftover ham.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough pea and ham soup to serve 2 people (or 4 starter-sized portions):

Ingredients for making pea and ham soup.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Peas: Use fresh or frozen peas in this recipe.

Ham: Choose wafer thin or thick cut ham, which ever you prefer. This recipe is perfect for using up any leftover ham thats about to go out of date. Or why not try with gammon.

Crème fraîche: Crème fraîche is used here to add a slight creaminess to the soup without making it too rich, however it is completely optional. Alternatively use plain yogurt or soured cream.

Mint: Chopped mint is the perfect partner to this soup and adds a lovely freshness to the sweet peas, but again this is an optional extra.

Stock: Use good quality stock, both vegetable or a meat based stock will work well.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Melt the butter in a large pan on a medium heat. Add the onions and garlic and fry until soft.
  2. Next add the flour and stir in well.
  3. Gradually add the stock whilst continuing to stir.
  4. Add the frozen peas then simmer for 2-3 minutes until cooked through.Four images showing how to make pea and ham soup for steps 1-4.
  5. Remove the pan from the heat and transfer the soup to a blender. Blitz until smooth. (alternatively use a hand blender).
  6. Return the soup to the pan, once warmed through taste and season. Then add the ham, crème fraîche and mint leaves and mix in well. Serve with extra ham, crème fraîche and mint leaves.Two images showing how to make pea and ham soup for steps 5-6.

💭 Expert tips

  • Frozen peas: To get this meal on the table within 15 minutes I always opt for frozen peas. Frozen peas are a great veg to have handy in the freezer. Just add directly to the soup and cook for a couple of minutes. So easy! 
  • Vegetarian version: For a veggie version of this recipe just leave out the ham or alternatively try my Tuscan Ribollita Soup, Leek and Potato Soup or Cauliflower Soup.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to store?

Once made this soup can be stored in the fridge or freezer. Simply wait for the soup to fully cool then transfer to a sealable container. Seal and store in the fridge for 2-3 days or freeze for up to one month. To reheat defrost in the fridge overnight (if frozen) then transfer to a pan and gently heat until piping hot throughout.

How do you thicken pea and ham soup?

This recipe uses flour as a thickening agent, which is added at the start of the recipe. The stock is gradually stirred in, allowing the flour to cook out and create a thick sauce.

How do you make soup thinner?

If you find the soup to be too thick once its been blended, it can be thinned down by adding a ladle of water. Stir in the water and keep adding small amounts of water until happy with the consistency.

pea and ham soup in a bowl with creme fraishe, mint leaves and ground black pepper.

🍵 Other soup recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Pea and ham soup in a bowl topped with creme fraiche, chunks of ham and fresh mint
Print

Pea and Ham Soup

Quick and easy pea and ham soup, made with fresh or frozen peas and your favourite choice of ham. A filling and nutritious midweek meal or easy starter for your next dinner party, ready in just 15 minutes.
Course Dinner, lunch, supper
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 474kcal

Ingredients

  • 20 g butter
  • 1 onion finely chopped
  • 2 celery stalks finely chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic finely chopped
  • 20 g plain flour
  • 500 ml veg stock
  • 400 g frozen garden peas or if you have fresh - 500g un-podded peas - additional time need to pod your peas!
  • Sea salt and pepper to season
  • 125 g of your favourite choice of ham or gammon and extra to serve on top
  • 1 tablespoon crème fraîche and extra to serve on top (optional)
  • Handful fresh mint leaves finely chopped and extra to serve on top (optional)
  • Bread for dunking optional

Instructions

  • Melt the butter in a large pan on a medium heat. Add the onions, celery and garlic and fry until soft.
    20 g butter, 1 onion, 2 celery stalks, 2 cloves garlic
  • Next add the flour and stir in well.
    20 g plain flour
  • Gradually add the stock whilst continuing to stir.
    500 ml veg stock
  • Add the frozen peas then simmer for 2-3 minutes until cooked through.
    400 g frozen garden peas
  • Remove the pan from the heat and transfer the soup to a blender. Blitz until smooth (alternatively use a hand blender).
  • Return the soup to the pan, once warmed through check consistency, taste and season. Then add the ham, crème fraîche and mint leaves and mix in well. Serve with extra ham, crème fraîche and mint leaves.
    Sea salt and pepper to season, 125 g of your favourite choice of ham or gammon, 1 tablespoon crème fraîche, Handful fresh mint leaves

Video

Notes

Ham: Choose wafer thin or thick cut ham, which ever you prefer. This recipe is perfect for using up any leftover ham thats about to go out of date. Or why not try with gammon.
Crème fraîche: Crème fraîche is used here to add a slight creaminess to the soup without making it too rich, however it is completely optional. Alternatively use plain yogurt or soured cream.
Mint: Chopped mint is the perfect partner to this soup and adds a lovely freshness to the sweet peas, but again this is an optional extra.
Stock: Use good quality stock, both vegetable or a meat based stock will work well.
Frozen peas: To get this meal on the table within 15 minutes I always opt for frozen peas. Frozen peas are a great veg to have handy in the freezer. Just add directly to the soup and cook for a couple of minutes. So easy! 
Vegetarian version: For a veggie version of this recipe just leave out the ham or alternatively try my Tuscan Ribollita Soup, Leek and Potato Soup or Cauliflower Soup.
How to store? Once made this soup can be stored in the fridge or freezer. Simply wait for the soup to fully cool then transfer to a sealable container. Seal and store in the fridge for 2-3 days or freeze for up to one month. To reheat defrost in the fridge overnight (if frozen) then transfer to a pan and gently heat until piping hot throughout.
How do you thicken pea and ham soup? This recipe uses flour as a thickening agent, which is added at the start of the recipe. The stock is gradually stirred in, allowing the flour to cook out and create a thick sauce.
How do you make soup thinner? If you find the soup to be too thick once its been blended, it can be thinned down by adding a ladle of water. Stir in the water and keep adding small amounts of water until happy with the consistency. 

Nutrition

Serving: 192g | Calories: 474kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 60mg | Sodium: 1837mg | Potassium: 783mg | Fiber: 12g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 2332IU | Vitamin C: 85mg | Calcium: 78mg | Iron: 4mg

This post was first published in Jul 2018. Updated in Feb 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Pea and Ham Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/pea-and-ham-soup/feed/ 7
Smoked Haddock Risotto https://properfoodie.com/haddock-rosemary-risotto/ https://properfoodie.com/haddock-rosemary-risotto/#comments Sat, 29 Jan 2022 19:42:45 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1863 Creamy smoked haddock risotto flavoured with fresh rosemary and gently simmered in a pan of white wine, whole milk and vegetable stock. The fish is delicately poached beforehand and the whole recipe takes just over 30 minutes to make. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe If you've never made risotto before, this is the perfect recipe...

Read More

The post Smoked Haddock Risotto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Creamy smoked haddock risotto flavoured with fresh rosemary and gently simmered in a pan of white wine, whole milk and vegetable stock. The fish is delicately poached beforehand and the whole recipe takes just over 30 minutes to make.

Creamy smoked haddock risotto piled neatly on a small plate, with parmesan being sprinkle on top.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

If you've never made risotto before, this is the perfect recipe for first timers and risotto experts alike. With minimal fuss and ingredients, this smoked haddock risotto is easy to nurture into a pillowy pot of rice, with plenty of bite still left in each grain.

This is a warming, wholesome dish that is made by, simply and gradually, adding milky stock to starchy rice. A great option for the whole family, any night of the week.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough smoked haddock risotto to serve 2 people (or 4 starter-sized portions):

Ingredients for making fish risotto.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Risotto rice: For risotto rice you are looking for short grains with a high starch content. Look for rice labelled as Arborio, Carnaroli or simply; risotto rice.

Smoked Haddock: Smoked haddock gives risotto the most incredible flavour and in my opinion its the best fish to serve with this dish.

However, if you prefer you can opt for unsmoked haddock or smoked haddock that isn't dyed or try with another white, chunky fish such as cod instead.

Milk: This recipe uses whole milk, which adds to the creaminess of the risotto. If you prefer, use skimmed or semi skimmed or replace the milk completely with stock. Any of these options will result in a less creamy risotto.

Parmesan: Any hard Italian cheese will work well.

Wine: I love the flavour of white wine in risotto and so in my book, its always a must. But if required it can be replaced with a little apple juice or just left out completely.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Poach the smoked haddock in milk and stock. Then remove skin and flake the fish. save the poaching liquid (fish stock).
  2. Cook onion and garlic in butter in a wide pan. Then add risotto rice and stir to coat each grain in butter.
  3. Next, add the wine and cook until it has nearly all reduced.
  4. Add rosemary and gradually start to add fish stock.4 step by step images showing how to make smoked haddock risotto 1-4.
  5. Gradually add all the stock until the rice is soft and plump.
  6. Stir in grated parmesan and lemon juice. 
  7. Hot water can also be added to loosen the risotto if you prefer a slightly soupier consistency. Once you're happy with the risotto, stir in the flaked smoked haddock.
  8. Top with fresh parsley and extra grated parmesan and serve.4 process images for making fish risotto for steps 5-8.

💭 Expert tips

Butter: Use butter! A good helping of butter is always the best starting point for any risotto dish. Melted butter is used to 'awaken' the rice by coating and softening the uncooked grains so allowing liquids to be easily soaked in. 

Patience: Risotto does require a little patience. Take your time a don't rush the gradual addition of the stock, I promise its well worth it.

Poaching haddock: This is a delicate approach to cooking the fish, which keeps it moist and flaky. The fish juices will also flavours the milky stock, which is then added to the risotto.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What is the best rice for risotto?

Risotto rice is usually plump, short-medium grains with a high starch content. This gives risotto its well known creamy texture when cooked. In the shops look for rice labelled as Arborio, Carnaroli, Vialone nano or just simply; risotto rice.

Arborio rice is the most widely available type of risotto rice and produces a lovely thick and soft risotto, but can be susceptible to overcooking (becomes sloppy).

Carnaroli isn't as easy to find in the shops but is known to be the best due to its higher starch content and resistance to overcooking, which pretty much guarantees a thick and creamy risotto every time. Vialone nano has smaller, round grains and is considered to be as good as Carnaroli but produces a soupier risotto.

What is the best pan for cooking risotto?

The key to cooking risotto is a large surface area and allowing the rice to cook thoroughly and evenly in the stock. So any type of pan will do as long as it has a wide base. I recommend using a 30cm wide pan. A non-stick pan isn't essential so long as you pay close attention to the rice and maintain a good stir.

How do you know when risotto is cooked?

Taste the risotto, it should be soft and creamy. The grains should be firm but not chalky. If the rice still has a chalky bite, stir in a ladle of hot water and cook for a couple more minutes.

How to store?

Risotto is best made fresh. The rice doesn't reheat well and more often than not, reheated risotto will overcook and become sloppy. So do bare this in mind when saving leftovers.

Transfer any leftovers to sealable containers. Make sure the risotto has fully cooled before sealing and storing in the fridge for up to 2 days. Cooled risotto will set and become hard. Reheat by returning to the pan with a little hot water and stir until heated through and piping hot. (Please note that proper cooling and reheating is essential for rice dishes).

Large shallow casserole dish filled with creamy smoked haddock risotto and topped with parsley.

🍝 Other Italian recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Creamy smoked haddock risotto piled neatly on a small plate, with parmesan being sprinkle on top.
Print

Smoked Haddock Risotto

Creamy smoked haddock risotto flavoured with fresh rosemary and gently simmered in a pan of white wine, whole milk and vegetable stock. The fish is delicately poached in the warm stock and milk beforehand and the whole recipe takes just over 30 minutes to make.
Course Dinner, Main Course, starter or main
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 833kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 2 fillets 280g of smoked haddock
  • 450 ml vegetable stock
  • 450 ml whole milk
  • 20 g butter
  • 1 onion finely chopped
  • 1 garlic clove finely chopped
  • 170 g risotto rice
  • 150 ml white wine
  • 1 sprig fresh rosemary
  • 1 lemon juiced
  • 25 g grated parmesan or other hard Italian cheese
  • 15 g fresh chopped parsley
  • Extra parmesan to serve

Instructions

To poach the fish:

  • Pour the cold stock and milk into a wide pan. Stir together then place in the haddock fillets and bring the pan to a simmer. Gently poach for 3 minutes making sure the pan doesn’t boil. Then remove the fish with a slotted spoon and break into chunky flakes, discarding any skin. Keep the milky stock warm in the pan ready for making the risotto.

To make the risotto:

  • Melt the butter in a wide (30cm) pan. Add the chopped onion and garlic and cook until soft. Then add the risotto rice and stir into the onion allowing the melted butter to coat and gently warm each grain.
  • Next, add the wine and cook until it has nearly all reduced.
  • Add the sprig off rosemary and then start to add the milky stock one ladle at a time. Stir attentively between each addition, only adding another ladleful when the previous one has been fully absorbed.
  • Make sure all the milky stock goes into the risotto. It will probably take around 15-20 minutes to gradually add the whole lot. By this point the rice should have softened and plumped.
  • Add the grated parmesan and lemon juice. Stir in well and keep cooking for a further minute to allow the lemon juice to absorb. Taste the risotto, it should be soft and creamy. The grains should be firm but not chalky. If the rice still has a chalky bite, stir in a ladle of hot water and cook for a couple more minutes.
  • Hot water can also be added to loosen the risotto if you prefer a slightly soupier consistency. Once you're happy with the risotto, stir in the flaked smoked haddock.
  • Top with fresh parsley and extra grated parmesan and serve.

Video

Notes

Risotto rice: For risotto rice you are looking for short grains with a high starch content. Look for rice labelled as Arborio, Carnaroli, Vialone nano or simply; risotto rice.
Smoked Haddock: Smoked haddock gives risotto the most incredible flavour and in my opinion its the best fish to serve with this dish. However, if you prefer you can opt for unsmoked haddock or smoked haddock that isn't dyed or try with another white, chunky fish such as cod instead.
Milk: This recipe uses whole milk, which adds to the creaminess of the risotto. If you prefer, use skimmed or semi skimmed or replace the milk completely with stock. Any of these options will result in a less creamy risotto.
Parmesan: Any hard Italian cheese will work well.
Wine: I love the flavour of white wine in risotto and so in my book, its always a must. But if required it can be replaced with a little apple juice or just left out completely.
Butter: Use butter! A good helping of butter is always the best starting point for any risotto dish. Melted butter is used to 'awaken' the rice by coating and softening the uncooked grains so allowing liquids to be easily soaked in. 
Patience: Risotto does require a little patience. Take your time a don't rush the gradual addition of the stock, I promise its well worth it.
Poaching haddock: This is a delicate approach to cooking the fish, which keeps it moist and flaky. The fish juices will also flavours the milky stock, which is then added to the risotto.
What is the best rice for risotto? Risotto rice is usually plump, short-medium grains with a high starch content. This gives risotto its well known creamy texture when cooked. In the shops look for rice labelled as Arborio, Carnaroli, Vialone nano or just simply; risotto rice. 


Arborio rice is the most widely available type of risotto rice and produces a lovely thick and soft risotto, but can be susceptible to overcooking (becomes sloppy). Carnaroli isn't as easy to find in the shops but is known to be the best due to its higher starch content and resistance to overcooking, which pretty much guarantees a thick and creamy risotto every time. Vialone nano has smaller, round grains and is considered to be as good as Carnaroli but produces a soupier risotto.
How to store? Risotto is best made fresh. The rice doesn't reheat well and more often than not, reheated risotto will overcook and become sloppy. So do bare this in mind when saving leftovers. 


Transfer any leftovers to sealable containers. Make sure the risotto has fully cooled before sealing and storing in the fridge for up to 2 days. Cooled risotto will set and become hard. Reheat by returning to the pan with a little hot water and stir until heated through and piping hot. (Please note that proper cooling and reheating is essential for rice dishes).
What is the best pan for cooking risotto? The key to cooking risotto is a large surface area and allowing the rice to cook thoroughly and evenly in the stock. So any type of pan will do as long as it has a wide base. I recommend using a 30cm wide pan. A non-stick pan isn't essential so long as you pay close attention to the rice and maintain a good stir.

Nutrition

Calories: 833kcal | Carbohydrates: 91g | Protein: 54g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 163mg | Sodium: 2339mg | Potassium: 1158mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 1949IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 501mg | Iron: 7mg

This post was first published in May 2016. Updated in Jan 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

 

The post Smoked Haddock Risotto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/haddock-rosemary-risotto/feed/ 6
Roast Chicken https://properfoodie.com/roast-chicken/ https://properfoodie.com/roast-chicken/#respond Sun, 17 Oct 2021 16:55:55 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=12279 Roast chicken with lemon herb butter, cooked until golden on the outside and tender and juicy on the inside. This simple recipe shows how easy it is to make roast chicken for your Sunday dinner with minimal fuss and maximum flavour. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe A whole roast chicken is a great option for...

Read More

The post Roast Chicken appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Roast chicken with lemon herb butter, cooked until golden on the outside and tender and juicy on the inside. This simple recipe shows how easy it is to make roast chicken for your Sunday dinner with minimal fuss and maximum flavour.

whole chicken roasted and presented on a large plate with cooked carrots and onions and fresh herbs.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

A whole roast chicken is a great option for Sunday dinner at home. Roast chicken is smaller, cheaper and easier to cook than any other roast dinner option. However, Roast beef, Roast Turkey or Leg of lamb are also achievable, but may just require a little more time, effort and expense.

This recipe is all about roasting that perfect chicken with a glistening skin that has been lovingly basted with lemon herb butter. With very little time and effort you can make a succulent whole roast chicken that will go down a storm, especially when served up with all the trimmings. Try with homemade Yorkshire Puddings, crispy roast potatoes, creamy mash potatoes, cauliflower cheese, honey glazed carrots and parsnips, green bean almondine and of course lashings of gravy.

🥘 Ingredients

To make a whole roast chicken with lemon and herb butter you will need:

  • 50g Softened butter
  • 2 cloves Garlic
  • Zest and juice of ½ lemon
  • 3 Sprigs fresh thyme (leaves removed from stems)
  • 1.5 kg Whole chicken
  • 2 Springs rosemary
  • 3 Sprigs thyme
  • 2 Bay leaves
  • ½ Lemon
  • ½ Garlic bulb
  • Salt and pepper
  • Roughly chopped root veggies

Ingredient notes

Recipe: For the full recipe and amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Garlic: This recipe uses fresh garlic but you could substitute with jarred garlic or garlic paste.

Fresh herbs: This recipe uses fresh herbs for the both the butter and chicken. However, if you can't get hold of fresh you can replace each with a teaspoon of dried herbs.

Root vegetables: The root vegetables are used as a rack for the chicken to sit on. I prefer to use veg as it adds to the flavour. However, if you have a metal rack for your roasting tin you can just use this instead.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pre heat the oven to 190°C (Fan) / 375°F. Prepare the herb butter by mashing the butter with minced garlic, lemon juice and zest and fresh thyme leaves. Then set to one side.
  2. Unpack the chicken and remove any giblets from the cavity. If the legs are tied together, un-tie and open up to see inside the cavity. Place half a lemon, half a garlic bulb inside the cavity. Next take 2 sprigs of rosemary, together with 3 sprigs of thyme and wrap 2 bay leaves around the sprigs. Secure the bunch of fresh herbs by wrapping and tying with string. Add the bunch of herbs to the cavity along with the lemon and garlic.
  3. Next, take the lemon herb butter and use the back of a spoon to spread the butter all over the surface of the chicken skin. Make sure to spread over the legs and wings as well.
  4. Once the butter is evenly spread, bring the legs back together to close the entrance to the cavity and tie with string.Four images showing how to cook a whole roast chicken steps 1-4.
  5. Roughly chop up some root vegetables to sit in the base of the roasting tin to act as a rack for the chicken. Carefully transfer the prepared chicken onto the vegetable rack.
  6. Place the roasting tin into the centre of the preheated oven and cook according to the weight of the bird: Cook for 20 minutes per lb or per 500g, plus an extra 20 minutes after this. Check the chicken at least once (ideally 2 or 3 times) during cooking and baste (spoon juices back over the skin). If the skin looks like it might be burning at any point, pop over a bit of foil.
  7. Check the chicken is cooked by inserting a skewer into the breast. The juices should run out clear. Alternatively insert a meat thermometer into the breast. If the chicken appears under cooked place back in the oven for 10 minute intervals until cooked. Then cover and rest for around 10 minutes. You can use this time to dish up the rest of your Sunday roast.
  8. After the chicken is well rested, remove the foil and transfer the chicken to a carving board. Carve with a sharp knife and serve.Four images showing how to cook a whole roast chicken steps 5-8..

💭 Expert tips

  • If using fresh garlic in the herb butter: Mince the garlic by chopping finely, then add a pinch of sea salt and scrape the knife over the garlic and salt to create a garlic paste.
  • Cook the chicken on a bed of chopped carrots and onions, which raises the chicken up out of its juices. This adds to the flavour and releases moisture during cooking, which helps to keep the meat succulent. 
  • Coat the skin in the lemon herb butter before cooking to add flavour and to keep moisture in.
  • Sit the chicken on a rack of chopped veg (which will release moisture) to help prevent the meat from drying out.
  • Baste the chicken two or three times during cooking to keep the flavour in and to help the skin cook and turn golden brown.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Do you cover roast chicken?

Covering a chicken with foil during roasting is not necessary and I much prefer to leave the skin uncovered giving it plenty of time to turn to a nice golden brown colour. Follow the tips above to ensure the meat stays nice and juicy.

How long does it take to roast a chicken?

As a general rule chicken should be roasted for 20 minutes per lb or per 500g, plus an extra 20 minutes after that. So a 1.5kg chicken would need 1 hour 20 minutes and a 2kg chicken would need 1 hour 40 minutes. During roasting the chicken should be checked at least once (2 or 3 times if you can) and basted with the juices.

What oven temperature for roast chicken?

To make sure a chicken is thoroughly cooked, it should be roasted at approximately 180-190°C (Fan) / 350-375°F. You can pick the higher or lower end of this depending on how your oven cooks.

What temperature should a thermometer read for chicken?

You should be looking for the thermometer to reach 75°C / 165°F when inserted into the middle of the chicken breast. 

Whole roast chicken with golden skin served on a large plate surrounded by roast carrots, onions and fresh herbs.

🥘 Other sunday roast recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

whole chicken roasted and presented on a large plate with cooked carrots and onions and fresh herbs.
Print

Roast Chicken

Roast chicken with lemon herb butter, cooked until golden on the outside and tender and juicy on the inside. This simple recipe shows how easy it is to make roast chicken for your Sunday dinner with minimal fuss and maximum flavour.
Course Dinner, roast dinner, sunday dinner, sunday lunch
Cuisine British
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 496kcal

Equipment

  • Medium mixing bowl
  • String (for tying herbs together and for tying together chicken legs)
  • Large roasting tin
  • Carving knife

Ingredients

For the lemon herb butter

  • 50 g Softened butter
  • 2 cloves Garlic
  • ½ lemon juiced and zested
  • 3 Sprigs fresh thyme leaves removed from stems

For the chicken:

  • 1.5 kg Whole chicken
  • ½ Lemon
  • ½ Garlic bulb
  • 2 Springs rosemary
  • 3 Sprigs thyme
  • 2 Bay leaves
  • Salt and pepper
  • Root veggies roughly chopped to sit the chicken on in the tray

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 190°C (Fan) / 375°F. Prepare the herb butter by mashing the butter with minced garlic, lemon juice and zest and fresh thyme leaves. Set to one side. 
NOTE: Mash together using a fork.
    50 g Softened butter, 2 cloves Garlic, ½ lemon juiced and zested, 3 Sprigs fresh thyme
  • Remove and discard any packaging from the chicken. If you have bought the chicken from your butchers check the cavity for the giblets. Remove and discard the giblets or if you prefer use to make gravy.
If the legs are tied together, un-tie and open up to see inside the cavity. Place half a lemon, half a garlic bulb inside the cavity. Next take 2 sprigs of rosemary, together with 3 sprigs of thyme and wrap 2 bay leaves around the sprigs. Secure the bunch of fresh herbs by wrapping and tying with string. Add the bunch of herbs to the cavity along with the lemon and garlic.
    1.5 kg Whole chicken, 2 Springs rosemary, 3 Sprigs thyme, ½ Lemon, ½ Garlic bulb, 2 Bay leaves
  • Next, take the lemon herb butter and use the back of a spoon to spread the butter all over the surface of the chicken skin. Make sure to spread over the legs and wings as well. Sprinkle salt and pepper over the top of the butter.
    Salt and pepper
  • Once the butter is evenly spread, bring the legs back together to close the entrance to the cavity and tie with string.
  • Roughly chop up some root vegetables to sit in the base of the roasting tin to act as a rack for the chicken. Carefully transfer the prepared chicken onto the vegetable rack.
    Root veggies roughly chopped to sit the chicken on in the tray
  • Place the roasting tin into the centre of the preheated oven and cook according to the weight of the bird: Cook for 20 minutes per lb or per 500g, plus an extra 20 minutes after this. Check the chicken at least once (ideally 2 or 3 times) during cooking and baste (spoon juices back over the skin). If the skin looks like it might be burning at any point, pop over a bit of foil.
  • Check the chicken is cooked by inserting a skewer into the breast. The juices should run out clear. Alternatively insert a meat thermometer into the breast. If the chicken appears under cooked place back in the oven for 10 minute intervals until cooked.
If you are satisfied that the chicken is thoroughly cooked, cover with foil and then a tea towel (to keep the heat in) and rest for around 10 minutes. You can use this time to dish up the rest of your Sunday roast.
  • After the chicken is well rested, remove the foil and transfer the chicken to a carving board. Carve with a sharp knife and serve.

Video

Notes

Garlic: This recipe uses fresh garlic but you could substitute with jarred garlic or garlic paste.
Fresh herbs: This recipe uses fresh herbs for the both the butter and chicken. However, if you can't get hold of fresh you can replace each with a teaspoon of dried herbs.
Root vegetables: the root vegetables are used as a rack for the chicken to sit on. I prefer to use veg as it adds to the flavour. However, if you have a metal rack for your roasting tin you can just use this instead.
Do you cover roast chicken? Covering a chicken with foil during roasting is not necessary and I much prefer to leave the skin uncovered giving it plenty of time to turn to a nice golden brown colour. Follow the ‘expert tips’ in the post above to ensure the meat stays nice and juicy.
How long does it take to roast a chicken? As a general rule chicken should be roasted for 20 minutes per lb or per 500g, plus an extra 20 minutes after that. So a 1.5kg chicken would need 1 hour 20 minutes and a 2kg chicken would need 1 hour 40 minutes. During roasting the chicken should be checked at least once (2 or 3 times if you can) and basted with the juices.
What oven temperature for roast chicken? To make sure a chicken is thoroughly cooked, it should be roasted at approximately 180-190°C (Fan) / 350-375°F. You can pick the higher or lower end of this depending on how your oven cooks.
What temperature should a thermometer read for chicken? If you like to use a meat thermometer to check that your chicken is cooked through, you should be looking for the thermometer to reach 75°C / 165°F when inserted into the middle of the chicken breast. 

Nutrition

Serving: 394g | Calories: 496kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 162mg | Sodium: 217mg | Potassium: 429mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 882IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 3mg

This post was first published in Feb 2020. Updated in Oct 2021 with new step by step instructions and expert tips.

 

 

 

The post Roast Chicken appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/roast-chicken/feed/ 0
Massaman Curry https://properfoodie.com/massaman-curry/ https://properfoodie.com/massaman-curry/#respond Mon, 11 Oct 2021 21:14:32 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11893 Massaman curry recipe made with an aromatic curry paste, chunks of juicy chicken, sliced new potatoes and a Thai coconut cream sauce. Great served up with cashew nuts, sliced red chillies and fragrant fresh coriander. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Massaman is a mild Thai curry recipe made with a yellow Massaman curry paste, coconut...

Read More

The post Massaman Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Massaman curry recipe made with an aromatic curry paste, chunks of juicy chicken, sliced new potatoes and a Thai coconut cream sauce. Great served up with cashew nuts, sliced red chillies and fragrant fresh coriander.

A bowl of chicken and potato curry in a coconut cream sauce.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Massaman is a mild Thai curry recipe made with a yellow Massaman curry paste, coconut milk and potatoes. Massaman curry recipes tends to be milder and sweeter than other Thai curries due to the addition of spices like cinnamon, star anise and cardamom. So its a great option if you're not a fan of spicy foods and whats more this lovely curry can be made and on the table within 45 minutes.

Massaman is the mildest of the Thai curries, so opt for the more spicy Thai red curry or Thai green curry if you're after something with a bit more heat.

🥘 Ingredients

To make massaman curry for 4 people you will need:

  • ½ tablespoon Oil
  • 1 Garlic clove finely chopped 
  • 1 Onion sliced
  • 2 Chicken Breasts cubed (360g)
  • 25g potatoes, chopped into bite sized pieces
  • 2 tablespoon Massaman Curry paste (homemade or shop bought)
  • 400ml tin of Coconut milk (full fat)
  • 1 teaspoon sugar
  • 1 Star anise
  • 100g sugar snap peas (roughly chopped)
  • ½ teaspoon Fish sauce
  • ½ a lime juiced
  • Toppings: Fresh coriander, sliced red chillies and chopped cashew nuts

Ingredient notes

Recipe: For the full recipe and amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Chicken: This recipe uses raw chicken. However, cooked shredded chicken can also be used. This means you could buy a rotisserie chicken or use leftover chicken from a previous meal.

Potatoes: Choose a waxy variety that will hold together well such as Charlotte, Anya, baby or new potatoes. Leave the skins on for a more rustic finish and to add more fibre to your meal.

Coconut milk: Coconut milk is the base of most Thai curries. However, if you need a different option the best replacement in terms of consistency and flavour is cream. This can be a little heavy so you could also use yogurt (full fat).

Fish sauce: Fish sauce is the main seasoning ingredient in Thai cooking and completely transforms the dish. I highly recommend using fish sauce in this recipe for the best flavour. If you can't get hold of any or if you are making a vegetarian curry, you can substitute with soy sauce, Worcestershire sauce or seaweed paste.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place a large pan on a medium heat and the oil, garlic and sliced onions and gently fry until starting to soften. Next add the chicken and stir fry to seal off the edges of the meat.
  2. Add the sliced potatoes to the chicken and onions and continue to stir fry for 2 to 3 minutes so allowing the potatoes to start cooking. Then transfer the contents of the pan to a large bowl and set to one side.
  3. Return the pan to the heat and add 2 large tablespoon of Massaman curry paste (homemade or shop bought). Cook for a minute or so and allow the paste to release its flavours. Turn the pan to a low heat and stir in the coconut milk, sugar and star anise.
  4. When the sauce has heated through add the partially cooked chicken, potatoes and onions and mix in until well coated in the sauce. Bring the pan to a very gentle simmer then place on a lid and cook for 20 minutes or until the chicken is cooked through and the potatoes are soft.Four images showing how to make Thai chicken and potato curry steps 1-4.
  5. Next add the chopped sugar snap peas to the curry and simmer for a further 2 minutes.
  6. Find and remove the star anise. Then taste the curry and season to your liking with lime juice and fish sauce.Two images showing how to make massaman curry steps 5 and 6.
  7. Serve and top with freshly sliced red chillies, fresh coriander leaves and chopped cashews nuts.

💭 Expert tips

Chicken massaman curry: The chicken can be replace with your preferred meat or fish (lamb or cod are good options). Or swap in for veggies (courgette, aubergine, sweet potato) if you want to make a vegetarian tikka masala.

Coconut milk: This will have separated in the can so give it a shake and a stir before adding to the pan.

Spicy massaman curry: For an extra kick add in sliced chilli pepper or a few drops of Tabasco or a teaspoon of hot chilli powder.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to store?

Once made, allow the massaman curry to completely cool then transfer to a sealable container and keep in the fridge for 2 days or or in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost in the fridge overnight. Reheat in a pan or in the microwave until piping hot throughout.

What to serve with massaman curry?

Serve up with a helping of jasmine rice or plain rice, plus extra cashew nuts, fresh chilli and fresh coriander.

What is the difference between Massaman curry and Yellow curry?

Massaman curry is a type of yellow curry but isn't exactly the same as Thai yellow curry. The paste used in Massaman curry starts off as Thai yellow curry paste but extra, sweeter spices are mixed into this to create the Massaman flavour.  

What flavour is massaman?

Massaman is a very mild, sweet Thai curry. The flavours of the cinnamom and cardamom really stand out and the milder sauce means you can really taste the coconut milk. The addition of potatoes helps to provide a thicker consistency to the sauce

A bowl of Thai curry made with chicken, sliced potatoes and massaman curry sauce.

🍛 Other easy homemade curry recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A bowl of massaman curry with sliced new potatoes and chunks of chicken.
Print

Massaman Curry

Massaman curry recipe made with an aromatic curry paste, chunks of juicy chicken, sliced new potatoes and a Thai coconut cream sauce. Great served up with cashew nuts, sliced red chillies and fragrant fresh coriander.
Course Dinner, Main Course, main meal
Cuisine Thai, Thailand
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 440kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • ½ tablespoon Oil
  • 1 Garlic clove finely chopped
  • 1 Onion sliced
  • 3 Chicken Breasts cubed 500g
  • 250 g potatoes chopped into bite sized pieces
  • 2 tablespoon Massaman Curry paste homemade or shop bought
  • 400 ml tin of Coconut milk full fat
  • 1 teaspoon sugar
  • 1 Star anise
  • 100 g sugar snap peas roughly chopped
  • ½ teaspoon Fish sauce
  • ½ a lime juiced
  • Toppings: Fresh coriander sliced red chillies and chopped cashew nuts

Instructions

  • Place a large pan on a medium heat and the oil, garlic and sliced onions and gently fry until starting to soften. Next add the chicken and stir fry to seal off the edges of the meat.
    ½ tablespoon Oil, 1 Garlic clove finely chopped, 1 Onion sliced, 3 Chicken Breasts cubed
  • Add the sliced potatoes to the chicken and onions and continue to stir fry for 2 to 3 minutes so allowing the potatoes to start cooking. Then transfer the contents of the pan to a large bowl and set to one side.
    250 g potatoes
  • Return the pan to the heat and add 2 large tablespoon of Massaman curry paste (homemade or shop bought). Cook for a minute or so and allow the paste to release its flavours. Turn the pan to a low heat and stir in the coconut milk, sugar and star anise.
    2 tablespoon Massaman Curry paste, 400 ml tin of Coconut milk, 1 teaspoon sugar, 1 Star anise
  • When the sauce has heated through add the partially cooked chicken, potatoes and onions and mix in until well coated in the sauce. Bring the pan to a very gentle simmer then place on a lid and cook for 20 minutes or until the chicken is cooked through and the potatoes are soft.
  • Next add the chopped sugar snap peas to the curry and simmer for a further 2 minutes.
    100 g sugar snap peas
  • Find and remove the star anise. Then taste the curry and season to your liking with lime juice and fish sauce.
    ½ a lime juiced, ½ teaspoon Fish sauce
  • Serve and top with freshly sliced red chillies, fresh coriander leaves and chopped cashews nuts.
    Toppings: Fresh coriander

Video

Notes

Chicken: This recipe uses raw chicken. However, cooked shredded chicken can also be used. This means you could buy a rotisserie chicken or use leftover chicken from a previous meal.
Potatoes: Choose a waxy variety that will hold together well such as Charlotte, Anya, baby or new potatoes. Leave the skins on for a more rustic finish and to add more fibre to your meal.
Coconut milk: Coconut milk is the base of most Thai curries. However, if you need a different option the best replacement in terms of consistency and flavour is cream. This can be a little heavy so you could also use yogurt (full fat).
Fish sauce: Fish sauce is the main seasoning ingredient in Thai cooking and completely transforms the dish. I highly recommend using fish sauce in this recipe for the best flavour. If you can't get hold of any or if you are making a vegetarian curry, you can substitute with soy sauce, Worcestershire sauce or seaweed paste.
Chicken massaman curry: The chicken can be replace with your preferred meat or fish (lamb or cod are good options). Or swap in for veggies (courgette, aubergine, sweet potato) if you want to make a vegetarian tikka masala.
Coconut milk: This will have separated in the can so give it a shake and a stir before adding to the pan.
Spicy massaman curry: For an extra kick add in sliced chilli pepper or a few drops of Tabasco or a teaspoon of hot chilli powder.
How to store? Once made, allow the massaman curry to completely cool then transfer to a sealable container and keep in the fridge for 2 days or or in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost in the fridge overnight. Reheat in a pan or in the microwave until piping hot throughout.
What to serve with massaman curry? Serve up with a helping of jasmine rice or plain rice, plus extra cashew nuts, fresh chilli and fresh coriander.

Nutrition

Serving: 279g | Calories: 440kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 20g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 80mg | Sodium: 223mg | Potassium: 1047mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1494IU | Vitamin C: 34mg | Calcium: 63mg | Iron: 5mg

This post was first published in Jan 2020. Updated in Oct 2021 with new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Massaman Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/massaman-curry/feed/ 0
Italian Pasta Salad https://properfoodie.com/italian-pasta-salad/ https://properfoodie.com/italian-pasta-salad/#respond Fri, 24 Sep 2021 14:19:24 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10857 A fresh and vibrant Italian pasta salad made with wholegrain pasta, juicy tomatoes and creamy mozzarella. This nutritious and full flavoured pasta salad is perfect for dishing out at lunches or parties and is great as an on the go snack or working lunch. Make this Italian Pasta salad recipe in just 15 minutes and...

Read More

The post Italian Pasta Salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A fresh and vibrant Italian pasta salad made with wholegrain pasta, juicy tomatoes and creamy mozzarella. This nutritious and full flavoured pasta salad is perfect for dishing out at lunches or parties and is great as an on the go snack or working lunch. Make this Italian Pasta salad recipe in just 15 minutes and enjoy topped with fresh basil and a homemade Italian dressing.

Large bowl filled with cooked fusilli pasta, colourful tomatoes, cucumber, mozzarella pearls and topped with basil leaves and grated pecorino.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Italian Pasta salad is one of those recipes that literally has everything going for it. Its easy to make, easy to store, great for meal prep and really useful for using up any leftovers.

The best thing about pasta salad is the variety of ingredients that can be used; from different types of pasta to numerous different fruits, vegetable and cheeses. Also, as its a cold dish, its easy to store in the fridge keeping everything lovely and fresh and crisp.

🥘 Ingredients

To make a large bowl of Italian pasta salad at home you will need:

Italian pasta salad ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Pasta: This recipe uses wholegrain fusilli, but any type of small pasta will work well.

Tomatoes: Use fresh, vine ripened tomatoes. For an extra vibrant salad look for different colours of tomatoes (heritage/heirloom).

Mozzarella: A soft Italian cheese is essential for making this Italian pasta salad. Use small pearls of mozzarella or alternatively tear up a larger ball. Burrata is also a great option. Look for vegetarian alternatives if you are making a vegetarian salad.

Pecorino cheese: This is optional and can also be substituted with parmesan. Look for vegetarian alternatives if you are making a vegetarian salad.

Fresh basil and parsley: Fresh herbs are just the best taste in salads and I highly recommend using fresh basil at the very least. Especially in this Italian salad as it pairs perfectly with the tomatoes and mozzarella

Cannellini Beans: Beans are an optional extra and are used here to bulk out the salad and boost the protein content without adding meat.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Cook the pasta in boiling water for 10 minutes until al dente (or according to packet instructions). Place the cooked pasta and pasta salad ingredients in a large mixing bowl and toss together well.
  2. In a small bowl mix together 2 tablespoon olive oil, 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar, 1 teaspoon honey, 1 teaspoon wholegrain mustard, juice of half a lemon and 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning.
  3. Pour the dressing over the pasta salad and mix in.
  4. Top with freshly grated pecorino and basil leaves.Step by step images of how to make Italian pasta salad.

💭 Expert tips

  • For extra colour use green, red and yellow tomatoes. Heritage or heirloom tomatoes are usually the best option.
  • Make sure the cooked pasta is fully cooled before adding to the salad. To do this, drain into a sieve then rinse in cold water until the pasta is cold to the touch. There are 2 reasons for doing this. Firstly, to stop the cooking process and ensure the pasta doesn't go soggy. Secondly, to make sure that the rest of the ingredients stay crisp and fresh.
  • If you are cooking pasta for a warm dish, then it is not necessary to rinse the pasta. Instead add straight to the sauce like in this salmon pasta recipe or this salmon and prawn linguine.
  • To boost the protein content of this salad, without adding meat, add in a tin of drained cannellini beans.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to store?

Pasta salad will last 3 to 4 days if covered with a sealable lid or cling film and kept in the fridge. This recipe a great option for meal prep and will easily provide meals for 3 or 4 days.

How to you stop cooked pasta from sticking together?

To ensure the pasta doesn't stick together make sure the cooking water is boiling and stir the pasta well as soon as its placed into the water. After cooking rinse under cold water. If you aren't using the pasta right away it may eventually start to stick together. All you need to do is rinse the pasta under cold water again and toss until the pieces separate.

Can this recipe be made in advance?

Yes pasta salad can be made up to 3 days in advance then covered and stored in the fridge until ready to serve.

Large bowl filled with Italian Pasta Salad with a serving spoon and small bowl of grated pecorino cheese in the background.

🥗 Other delicious salad recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Large bowl filled with cooked fusilli pasta, colourful tomatoes, cucumber, mozzarella pearls and topped with basil leaves and grated pecorino.
Print

Italian Pasta Salad

A fresh and vibrant Italian pasta salad made with wholegrain pasta, juicy tomatoes and creamy mozzarella. This nutritious and full flavoured pasta salad is perfect for dishing out at lunches or parties and is great as an on the go snack or working lunch. Make this Italian Pasta salad recipe in just 15 minutes and enjoy topped with fresh basil and a homemade Italian dressing.
Course Dinner, lunch, party food
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 450kcal

Equipment

  • Large pan to cook pasta
  • Large mixing bowl for the pasta salad
  • Small bowl to make the dressing

Ingredients

For the Pasta Salad

  • 250 g Wholewheat fusilli pasta dried uncooked
  • 500 g heritage and/or baby tomatoes roughly chopped
  • 100 g cucumber chopped into small cubes
  • 80 g Red bell pepper chopped into small cubes
  • 60 g Black olives halved
  • 100 g Mozzarella pearls or large ball torn up
  • Handful of basil leaves roughly torn
  • Handful of fresh parsley finely chopped
  • Half tin of cannellini beans optional

For the Italian Dressing

  • 2 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar or any alternative cider vinegar
  • 1 teaspoon Honey
  • 1 teaspoon Wholegrain mustard
  • ½ a lemon
 juiced
  • 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning

Toppings

  • 25 g Freshly grated pecorino cheese or alternative hard cheese
  • Extra basil leaves

Instructions

  • Cook the pasta in boiling water for 10 minutes until al dente (or according to packet instructions). Place the cooked pasta and pasta salad ingredients in a large mixing bowl and toss together well.
    250 g Wholewheat fusilli pasta dried, 500 g heritage and/or baby tomatoes roughly chopped, 100 g cucumber chopped into small cubes, 80 g Red bell pepper chopped into small cubes, 60 g Black olives halved, 100 g Mozzarella pearls or large ball torn up, Handful of basil leaves roughly torn, Handful of fresh parsley finely chopped, Half tin of cannellini beans
  • In a small bowl mix together olive oil, apple cider vinegar, honey, wholegrain mustard, lemon juice and Italian seasoning.
    2 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil, 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar, 1 teaspoon Honey, 1 teaspoon Wholegrain mustard, ½ a lemon
 juiced, 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning
  • Pour the dressing over the pasta salad and mix in.
  • Top with freshly grated pecorino and basil leaves.
    25 g Freshly grated pecorino cheese, Extra basil leaves

Video

Notes

How to store? Pasta salad will last 3 to 4 days if covered with a sealable lid or cling film and kept in the fridge. This recipe a great option for meal prep and will easily provide meals for 3 or 4 days.
How to you stop cooked pasta from sticking together? To ensure the pasta doesn't stick together make sure the cooking water is boiling and stir the pasta well as soon as its placed into the water. After cooking rinse under cold water. If you aren't using the pasta right away it may eventually start to stick together. All you need to do is rinse the pasta under cold water again and toss until the pieces separate.
Can this recipe be made in advance? Yes pasta salad can be made up to 3 days in advance then covered and stored in the fridge until ready to serve.
Pasta: This recipe uses wholegrain fusilli, but any type of small pasta will work well.
Tomatoes: Use fresh, vine ripened tomatoes.
Mozzarella: A soft Italian cheese is essential for making this Italian pasta salad. Use small pearls of mozzarella or alternatively tear up a larger ball. Burrata is also a great option. Look for vegetarian alternatives if you are making a vegetarian salad.
Pecorino cheese: This is optional and can also be substituted with parmesan. Look for vegetarian alternatives if you are making a vegetarian salad.
Fresh basil and parsley: Fresh herbs are just the best taste in salads and I highly recommend using fresh basil at the very least. Especially in this Italian salad as it pairs perfectly with the tomatoes and mozzarella.
Cannellini Beans: Beans are an optional extra and are used here to bulk out the salad and boost the protein content without adding meat.
Tips:
  • For extra colour use green, red, orange and yellow tomatoes. Heritage or heirloom tomatoes are usually the best option.
  • Make sure the cooked pasta is fully cooled before adding to the salad. To do this, drain into a sieve then rinse in cold water until the pasta is cold to the touch. There are 2 reasons for doing this. Firstly, to stop the cooking process and ensure the pasta doesn't go soggy. Secondly, to make sure that the rest of the ingredients stay crisp and fresh.
  • If you are cooking pasta for a warm dish, then it is not necessary to rinse the pasta. Instead add straight to the sauce like in this salmon pasta recipe or this salmon and prawn linguine.

Nutrition

Serving: 296g | Calories: 450kcal | Carbohydrates: 61g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 16mg | Sodium: 417mg | Potassium: 553mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 2061IU | Vitamin C: 63mg | Calcium: 250mg | Iron: 5mg

This post was first published in Aug 2019. Updated in Sept 2021 with an improved photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Italian Pasta Salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/italian-pasta-salad/feed/ 0
Raspberry and Lemon Muffins https://properfoodie.com/raspberry-and-lemon-muffins/ https://properfoodie.com/raspberry-and-lemon-muffins/#comments Tue, 27 Jul 2021 20:43:23 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=3859 Raspberry and lemon muffins made in the traditional way for a perfectly light, crumbly and moist finish. Find out how to make the perfect muffin mix without splitting the mixture and get these delicious raspberry muffins made and baked in just 1 hour! Plus get the recipe for a zesty, lemon buttercream topping. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why...

Read More

The post Raspberry and Lemon Muffins appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Raspberry and lemon muffins made in the traditional way for a perfectly light, crumbly and moist finish.

Find out how to make the perfect muffin mix without splitting the mixture and get these delicious raspberry muffins made and baked in just 1 hour!

Plus get the recipe for a zesty, lemon buttercream topping.

Raspberry muffin topped with lemon butter cream sitting on a muffin case with the sides pulled away and surrounded a few other muffins.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

These citrusy raspberry and lemon muffins are the perfect sweet treat for after dinner or for afternoon tea. Make up a batch over the weekend then store in a air tight container so you can enjoy over the next 3 or 4 days.

This really easy recipe can be whipped up in a stand mixer or with an electric whisk. Either way you'll have these delicious muffins baking in the oven within half an hour.

🥘 Ingredients

To make raspberry and lemon muffins with lemon buttercream you will need:

Ingredients for making raspberry muffins.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Flour: This recipe uses UK self raising flour, which is different to the USA version. If you don't have this type of flour, it can be substituted for: 250g (2 cups) of all purpose flour + 1 level teaspoon of baking powder. For more info see this article on how to make self raising flour.

Caster Sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the recipe to make the muffins sweet. Caster sugar is the best option as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the raspberry muffins. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.

Icing sugar and unsalted butter: These are required to make the butter cream. A squeeze of lemon juice is added to make lemon flavoured buttercream. However, the buttercream is completely optional and these muffins are just as good served on their own.

Raspberries: The fresh raspberries could be swapped for your preferred soft fruit/berry. Why not try with blueberries for delicious blueberry and lemon muffins.

Lemons: Optional, leave out if you would prefer to just make raspberry muffins without lemon. The zest of the lemons is added to the muffin mixture and is also sprinkled on the top once baked. For no lemon-raspberry muffins, just omit these steps from the recipe.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Preheat the oven to 150 degrees C, Fan. Cube 150g of soft butter and add to the stand mixer bowl (or a mixing bowl if using an electric whisk). Next add the caster sugar and use the beater blade attachment, or electric whisk, to cream together the sugar and butter. Mix for a few minutes on the highest setting until the mixture is light and creamy.
  2. Next whisk the three eggs together and whilst the mixer is still on high gradually add the eggs into the mix. Add a spoonful of flour from time to time if it looks like the mixture might split.
  3. Once all the egg is incorporated, removed the bowl from the stand mixer and add the sifted, self raising flour and lemon zest. Use a spatula to fold in gently.
  4. Place muffin cases in the muffin tray and spoon the mixture into each case. Leave plenty of space for the muffins to rise by filling each case halfway.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Next wash and halve the raspberries and carefully push 4 or 5 raspberry halves into the mixture of each muffin.
  6. Place the muffins into the centre of the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until the tops have turned golden brown all over. Remove from the oven and set on a wire rack to cool.
  7. Whilst the muffins are cooling, prepared the buttercream. Clean out your mixer bowl and set back on the stand (alternatively use a bowl and electric whisk). Cube 200g of soft butter and add to the mixer or bowl along with the icing sugar.
  8. Use the beater attachment again (or electric whisk) and start the mixer on a low setting. This gives the icing sugar chance to mix in without covering you in icing dust. Once the icing and butter have started to combine, turn the mixer to high and leave for a few minutes until light and creamy. Add a squeeze of lemon juice and mix again for 2 more minutes. Taste and add more lemon juice if desired.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 5-8.
  9. Transfer the buttercream to a piping bag with star nozzle. Check the muffins are fully cooled then swirl on the buttercream. Serve with any leftover raspberries and with extra lemon zest sprinkled on top.

💭 Expert tips

  • For both the muffins and the buttercream bring your butter to room temperature and make sure it is nice and soft before you begin.
  • Adding the eggs can cause the muffin mixture to split. Make sure to add the eggs as slowly as you can particularly towards the end. If the mix looks like its split, add a spoonful of the flour to help bring it back together.
  • Mixing the flour too quickly into the muffin mix will remove the air and reduce the rise during baking. So use a spatula, fold the flour in gently and take your time.
  • Adding the raspberries to the mixture once its spooned into the cases helps to keep them intact and keeps them juicy and full of flavour. Mixing them in would cause the raspberries to break and the juice to run into the cake mix, so diluting their taste.
  • Check your muffins are fully cooled before adding the buttercream. If they are still warm the buttercream will melt and run.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to tell if the muffins are baked though?

The muffins will be done if they are gold brown on top and appear firm but springy on top. Or an inserted toothpick will come out clean.

How to store?

Once completely cooled the raspberry muffins (with or without buttercream) can be stored in an air tight container for 3-4 days.

What to serve with muffins?

If you aren't a fan of buttercream why not try these raspberry muffins with cream, ice cream, mascarpone, yogurt, honey or chocolate sauce.

What other ingredients could I add to these muffins?

To really boost the flavour of these muffins try adding to or substituting the raspberries or lemon zest with different ingredients. For example: chocolate chips, chocolate spread, poppy seeds, cinnamon, ground nutmeg, chopped nuts or other fruits such as banana, chopped mango, blueberries, dried apricot or glazed cherries.

Raspberry and lemon muffins on a wire rack viewed from above with bits of raspberry visible on the top of each muffin.

🍰 Other muffin recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Raspberry muffin topped with lemon butter cream sitting on a muffin case with the sides pulled away and surrounded a few other muffins.
Print

Raspberry and Lemon Muffins

Light and moist raspberry and lemon muffins. Made in the traditional way with fresh raspberries, lemon zest and lemon buttercream.
Course afternoon tea, Dessert, party food, pudding, Snack, sweet, treat
Cuisine British
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 12 muffins
Calories 457kcal

Equipment

  • Muffin cases and muffin tray
  • Stand mixer or electric hand-held whisk
  • Piping bag and star-shaped metal nozzle for swirling on the buttercream

Ingredients

For the raspberry muffins

  • 150 g soft unsalted butter
  • 150 g light brown caster sugar
  • 3 medium eggs
  • 150 g sifted self raising flour
  • 2 lemons zested
  • 200 g fresh raspberries
  • Extra lemon zest for topping

For the lemon buttercream

  • 200 g soft unsalted butter
  • 400 g white icing sugar
  • Squeeze of lemon juice

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 150 degrees C, Fan. Cube 150g of soft butter and add to the stand mixer bowl (or a mixing bowl if using an electric whisk). Next add the caster sugar and use the beater blade attachment, or electric whisk, to cream together the sugar and butter. Mix for a few minutes on the highest setting until the mixture is light and creamy.
  • Next whisk the three eggs together and whilst the mixer is still on high gradually add the eggs into the mix. Add a spoonful of flour from time to time if it looks like the mixture might split.
  • Once all the egg is incorporated, removed the bowl from the stand mixer and add the sifted, self raising flour and lemon zest. Use a spatula to fold in gently.
  • Place muffin cases in the muffin tray and spoon the mixture into each case. Leave plenty of space for the muffins to rise by filling each case halfway.
  • Next wash and halve the raspberries and carefully push 4 or 5 raspberry halves into the mixture of each muffin.
  • Place the muffins into the centre of the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until the tops have turned golden brown all over. Remove from the oven and set on a wire rack to cool.
  • Whilst the muffins are cooling, prepared the buttercream. Clean out your mixer bowl and set back on the stand (alternatively use a bowl and electric whisk). Cube 200g of soft butter and add to the mixer or bowl along with the icing sugar.
  • Use the beater attachment again (or electric whisk) and start the mixer on a low setting. This gives the icing sugar chance to mix in without covering you in icing dust. Once the icing and butter have started to combine, turn the mixer to high and leave for a few minutes until light and creamy. Add a squeeze of lemon juice and mix again for 2 more minutes. Taste and add more lemon juice if desired.
  • Transfer the buttercream to a piping bag with star nozzle. Check the muffins are fully cooled then swirl on the buttercream. Serve with any leftover raspberries and with extra lemon zest sprinkled on top.

Notes

How to tell if the muffins are baked though? The muffins will be done if they are gold brown on top and appear firm but springy on top. Or an inserted toothpick will come out clean. How to store? Once completely cooled the raspberry muffins (with or without buttercream) can be stored in an air tight container for 3-4 days.
What to serve with muffins? If you aren't a fan of buttercream why not try these raspberry muffins with cream, ice cream, mascarpone, yogurt, honey or chocolate sauce.
What other ingredients could I add to these muffins? To really boost the flavour of these muffins try adding to or substituting the raspberries or lemon zest with different ingredients. For example: chocolate chips, chocolate spread, poppy seeds, cinnamon, ground nutmeg, chopped nuts or other fruits such as banana, chopped mango, blueberries, dried apricot or glazed cherries.
Top tips:
  • For both the muffins and the buttercream bring your butter to room temperature and make sure it is nice and soft before you begin.
  • Adding the eggs can cause the muffin mixture to split. Make sure to add the eggs as slowly as you can particularly towards the end. If the mix looks like its split, add a spoonful of the flour to help bring it back together.
  • Mixing the flour too quickly into the muffin mix will remove the air and reduce the rise during baking. So use a spatula, fold the flour in gently and take your time.
  • Adding the raspberries to the mixture once its spooned into the cases helps to keep them intact and keeps them juicy and full of flavour. Mixing them in would cause the raspberries to break and the juice to run into the cake mix, so diluting their taste.
  • Check your muffins are fully cooled before adding the buttercream. If they are still warm the buttercream will melt and run. 



Nutrition

Serving: 82g | Calories: 457kcal | Carbohydrates: 57g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 104mg | Sodium: 20mg | Potassium: 61mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 46g | Vitamin A: 794IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in Mar 2017. Updated in July 2021 with an improved recipe and photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Raspberry and Lemon Muffins appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/raspberry-and-lemon-muffins/feed/ 7
Easy Recipes For Avocado https://properfoodie.com/easy-avocado-recipes/ https://properfoodie.com/easy-avocado-recipes/#respond Tue, 27 Jul 2021 11:40:52 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9187 Did ever you buy avocados and then, after having half of one on a salad, wondered what on earth you were going to do with the rest? Get some inspiration for your avocados with this simple avocado guide. Including lots of easy recipes for avocado. Plus, find out all you need to know about the...

Read More

The post Easy Recipes For Avocado appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Did ever you buy avocados and then, after having half of one on a salad, wondered what on earth you were going to do with the rest? Get some inspiration for your avocados with this simple avocado guide. Including lots of easy recipes for avocado.

Plus, find out all you need to know about the avocado! Where it comes from, why its so good for you, how to cut it, how to store it, how to stop it going that horrible brown colour and of course how to eat it.

three chicken wraps on a board viewed from above with half a lime squeezed at the side and small bowls of bean salad and smashed avocado above
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why eat avocado?

Avocado is a tasty and creamy, super healthy fruit that can be mushed up into a dip or smothered onto toast in seconds.

A good stock of avocados also means that you can have fresh guacamole on tortillas everyday!! Whats not to love?

Avocados are known for their amazing, unique taste and texture and they are also extremely rich in nutrients and antioxidants. An average avocado contains plenty of healthy fats, folate, potassium and fibre. Folate is particularly important for metabolic function. Other foods contain folate but cooking will destroy nearly half of the folate content. Generally not an occurrence with avocados. Although you can bake avocados if the need takes you.

Sliced avocado

One of the easiest recipes for avocado is to simply slice or cube it and serve up with your meal. I love to slice avocado over salad, alongside homemade chilli con carne, inside burritos or wraps or even on a sandwich or burger.

Mango Salsa Recipe
A refreshing mango salsa recipe, great served on its own or loaded on tortilla chips. Made with chunks of avocado, fiery red chilli and a good handful of fresh coriander. A perfect Caribbean starter or side dish and especially great with anything spicy. 
Make this recipe
Bowl of mango salsa with some being scooped out on a tortilla crisp.
Chicken Tinga burritos with homemade chipotle sauce
Spicy chicken burritos stuffed with rice and avocado, served with a homemade fiery Chipotle sauce, Greek yogurt and green chilli.
Make this recipe
Chicken burritos with homemade chipotle sauce
Fajita Spiced Chicken Platter
Spicy fajita chicken salad served with rice.
Make this recipe
Fajita spiced chicken platter with avocado salad
Mexican Chilli Con Carne Recipe (with cannellini beans)
This Mexican Chilli con carne recipe uses smoked paprika, ground cumin, chilli powder and tomatoes for the base of the sauce. These ingredients are combined and left to simmer gently for few hours reducing down and infusing to create a wonderfully rich and smokey sauce.
Make this recipe
chilli con carne in a bowl with cannellini beans and rice.

Smashed avocado

Smashed avocado is as it sounds, mashed up avocado. This is really simple and really quick avocado recipe. First, half the avocado and use the knife to remove the stone (see below for further details on how to cut an avocado). Then with the flesh still in the skin use a fork to mash up the flesh and then turn out into a bowl or over/alongside your meal. This is also the basis for making guacamole.

Simple Guacamole Recipe
A simple and authentic guacamole recipe with creamy avocado, perfect for spreading on your tacos or for dunking in tortillas. Easy to put together in just 5 minutes and a squeeze of lime helps keeps this lovely Mexican dip nice and fresh
Make this recipe
guacamole recipe
Healthy Chicken Wraps
Healthy chicken wraps with paprika chicken and Mexican style side dishes. In this recipe find out how to make these easy and healthy chicken wraps and the best way to season the chicken. Also get the recipes for easy homemade guacamole and three bean salad, which can be added to the wraps or served as side dishes.
Make this recipe
three healthy paprika chicken wraps on a board with a bowl of guacamole in the background

Avocado breakfast

I love to start the day with avocado. Avocado on toast is of course one of the most popular recipes for avocado and its so easy to make. Just smash or slice the avocado and place on top of your toast. Avocado and egg is also a great combination. Why not finish off your avocado toast with a couple of poached eggs or top some scrambled eggs with cubed avocado.

Prepare some avocado in advance for a great breakfast on the go:

Breakfast on the go
These three meal prep breakfasts are great for breakfast on the go. I'm always looking for breakfast ideas for eating at work and breakfasts pots like these are a great solution. They all come in at under 300 calories, take minutes to put together, keep well in the fridge overnight, and are full of healthy nutrients and high in protein.
Make this recipe
breakfast on the go

Avocado sushi

Sushi rolls are another great partner to avocado. Use as a sushi roll filling or as a topping on California rolls or dragon roll sushi. If you want to have a go at making sushi have a look at this guide for homemade sushi rolls.

📋 Homemade Sushi Rolls
Make homemade sushi rolls with my easy to follow, step-by-step guide and recipe video. Get my top tips and tricks and watch the video for making sushi at home. Including how to make sushi rice, maki sushi, California rolls, dragon rolls and nigiri sushi. Plus find out about the fantastic sushi kit I used to make this wonderful sushi platter.
The below will be enough to make a full platter (serves 4) of different sushi rolls or if you prefer a platter of one kind of sushi. See notes below for links to making a variety of homemade sushi rolls.
Make this recipe
homemade sushi rolls platter
📋 California rolls
California rolls with salmon, avocado and cucumber. This simple step by step guide will show you how to make your own California sushi rolls at home. Usually served without raw fish, this sushi roll is a great option for sushi-newbies, kids, and anyone who really can't stand uncooked fish.
Make this recipe
california rolls served on a black slate platter with a pair of chopsticks
📋 Dragon Roll Sushi
Dragon roll sushi is a California roll with thin slices of avocado and salmon lay on the top and following the curve of the roll. In this sushi guide I'll show you how easy it is to perfect the dragon roll at home.
Make this recipe
four pieces of sushi with slices of salmon and avocado on the top to mimic a dragon

How to cut avocado

The avocado can be quite tricky to cut if you've never done it before. The easiest way involves halving with a knife (moving around the stone). Then twist with your hands to separate the two halves. One half will have the stone stuck in the centre.

Next, carefully tap the stone with the blade of the knife so it sticks, then twist and the stone should move away from the flesh with the knife. Finally, with the avocado halves still within the skin, score the flesh with a knife and scoop out the cubed flesh with a spoon. 

How do you store avocado?

Keep ripe avocados in the fridge and unripe avocados on the side at room temperature. Wrap a cut avocado in cling film and keep in the fridge. If you can, leave the cut avocado in its skin and squeeze lemon or lime juice over any exposed flesh. Leftover avocado can also be pureed and frozen for up to 6 months.

How do you stop avocado going brown?

Avocado flesh oxidises very quickly once cut and exposed to the air (much like apple). In order to prevent the avocado from going brown squeeze lemon or lime juice over the exposed flesh. If making guacamole mix the citrus juice directly into the dip using around half a tablespoon of juice per avocado.

Can you eat avocado raw?

Avocado is usually eaten raw although it can be cooked. Baked avocado and eggs is a popular cooked avocado recipe. This is where the egg is cracked into half of an avocado and then baked until the egg is cooked through. However, its worth noting that the cooking process will reduce some of the fruits nutritional content.

Can you grow avocados yourself?

An avocado tree is a tropical plant and prefers a warm climate. However, it is possible to grow avocados in the UK. However, you need to grow the avocado plant inside or in a greenhouse and allow bees to pollinate the flowers. Do bear in mind that it can take 10 years for avocado trees to produce fruit! Check out this avocado trees article for more info on growing and caring for avocado plants.

About the avocado

The avocado (Persea Americana) is a fruit originating from Mexico, with evidence of avocado consumption dating back to 10,000BC. Avocados are classed as single-seeded berries as they grow on trees and are the matured ovary of a flower. They have a tough outer skin and contain a seed in the middle, much like a peach. The skin and seed make up about 33% of the whole weight of the avocado. More amazing avocado facts here!

Are avocados good for you?

Avocados have many benefits, here are a few reasons to include them in your diet:

  • Avocados are unique amongst other fruits and vegetables, in that they are much more nutrient dense and high in antioxidants. As well as providing antioxidants and dietary fibre, the avocado also contains healthy fats and so helps to promote a healthy lipid blood profile.
  • One half of an average avocado consists of: 114kcal, 5.9g carbohydrate, 0.2g sugar, 1.34g protein, 4.6g dietary fibre, 5.5mg sodium, 10.5g total fat and 6.7g monounsaturated fat. Amounts may vary depending on the size, season and ripeness of the fruit.
  • Avocado can be classed as a mediterranean-style food, although not traditionally part of the mediterranean diet. This is due to its high antioxidant, high fibre and and high monounsaturated fatty acid content. Therefore, the avocado may be able to claim the same health benefits as foods such as olive oil, oily fish, whole grains and other high fibre fruit and veg.
  • Avocados are also a farm to market food and require no processing, preservatives or taste enhancers. Their naturally tough skin reduces the need for packaging (and so plastics!!) and also provides some resistance against pests and disease.
  • The name of the avocado comes from the word 'ahuacatl', which is from the Nahuatl language spoken by the indigenous people of Mexico and El Salvador. The word itself refers to a part of the male anatomy that the shape of the avocado happens to resemble. The ancient Aztecs believed that the fruit helped to promote fertility. Funnily enough the fruit does contain high levels folate. Folate is important for metabolic pathways and cell division, which is essential in pregnancy when cells are dividing rapidly.

What does avocado taste like?

Avocado has a subtle, mild, creamy taste, which is very distinct. Avocado is mainly found in savoury dishes but is used in desserts in some parts of the world. Due to its creamy texture avocado is a great replacement for processed condiments such as mayonnaise. As the avocado is Mexican, its generally paired with Mexican flavours such as chilli and lime.

Avocado supply and demand

You may have noticed that avocados aren't cheap and prices are going up. This is all to do with the increase in demand for avocados in recent years. In addition, avocado growth requires huge quantities of water. Avocados are having a huge environmental, economical and social impact. Its worth bearing this in mind as we guzzle down our daily avocado fix. Find out more in the above link.

When to eat avocados

Avocados are imported into the UK (mainly from Spain) and so are available year round. If you want an extra special reason to eat avocados then make a note of its celebratory days:

The post Easy Recipes For Avocado appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/easy-avocado-recipes/feed/ 0
Roasted Cauliflower Salad https://properfoodie.com/roasted-cauliflower-salad-lemon-herb-dressing/ https://properfoodie.com/roasted-cauliflower-salad-lemon-herb-dressing/#comments Mon, 19 Jul 2021 21:21:28 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=8196 Roasted cauliflower salad with a lemon herb dressing. Nutty quinoa mixed with roasted cauliflower and chickpeas. Great for batch cooking and making in advance. This cauliflower salad is packed full of nutrients and tasty ingredients, with everything you need to fill you up and keep you feeling satisfied for the rest of the day. 👩🏻‍🍳...

Read More

The post Roasted Cauliflower Salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Roasted cauliflower salad with a lemon herb dressing. Nutty quinoa mixed with roasted cauliflower and chickpeas. Great for batch cooking and making in advance. This cauliflower salad is packed full of nutrients and tasty ingredients, with everything you need to fill you up and keep you feeling satisfied for the rest of the day.

Quinoa and roasted cauliflower salad with lemon & herb dressing, served in a small bowl sat on a blue napkin.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This roasted cauliflower salad is all about making a few healthy ingredients taste good together. The charred cauliflower and lemon infused quinoa mix together to create the base for a nutritious and full flavoured salad. Its easy to prepare and once made it can be stored in the fridge and used over several days.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this cauliflower salad recipe you will need:

Ingredients for making roasted cauliflower salad.

Ingredient notes

See recipe card at the bottom for full recipe and ingredients quantities.

Quinoa: Can be with your preferred grain. For a similar favour and nutrient content replace with brown rice. Or try with white rice, wild rice, couscous, barley buckwheat or bulgur wheat.

Chickpeas: Optional. Can be substituted for another pulse or bean.

Apple: Apple adds a sweet flavour to this citruses salad, which pairs perfectly with the crunchy hazelnuts and earthy quinoa. Can be substituted for your preferred fruit, try with dried cranberries, chopped mango or halved grapes.

Parsley: Optional but helps to brighten up the flavour and appearance of the salad

Hazelnuts: optional, leave out if your prefer or replace with another type of nut such as cashews, walnuts, almonds or peanuts.

Lemon, oil, dijon and creme fraishe: all of these are needed to make the salad dressing. If you prefer, swap for a salad dressing of your choosing.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pre heat oven to 200 degrees C. Chop the florets off the main stem of the cauliflower then chop into smaller bitesized pieces.
  2. Place chopped cauliflower florets in a bowl along with the drained chickpeas, oil, salt and pepper and lemon juice.
  3. Toss together well with your hands then transfer to a baking tray and bake in the preheated  oven for 30 minutes, shuffling the mixture half way through.
  4. Whilst the cauliflower is cooking place the quinoa in small saucepan with a wedge of lemon and covered with double the amount water. Simmer on medium heat for 15 minutes.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. With the cauliflower in the oven and the quinoa cooking in the pan, the dressing can be prepared. In a small bowl or container mix together the oil, mustard, creme fraiche, parsley, salt and lemon juice. Chill in the fridge until ready to serve.
  6. After the quinoa has been simmering for 15 minutes, take off the heat but do not remove the lid. Set to one side and leave with the lid on for 10 minutes.
  7. When the cauliflower is cooked remove from the oven and transfer to a large bowl. Remove the lid from the quinoa and discard the wedge of lemon. Fluff up the quinoa with a fork and then add to the bowl alongside the cauliflower. Next add the chopped apple, hazelnuts, fresh parsley and half of the dressing.
  8. Mix together well then serve with the remaining dressing.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 5-8.

💭 Expert tips

  • Cut cauliflower up on the tray that you intend to roast it on so that the bits of cauliflower are caught on the tray (makes it quicker and easier when cleaning up).
  • Roughly chop the cauliflower into bit size chunks. Try not to chop into tiny pieces as these can become mushy upon cooking.
  • Chop the apple up just before mixing into the salad to keep it fresh and prevent any browning.
  • The dressing for this recipe takes seconds to put together and really does transform the salad. The more you make - the better!! Place all the dressing ingredients into a small dish and mix together with a spoon...... Super easy and very tasty. I like to mix half of the dressing directly into the salad and leave the other half to drizzle on top.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can you eat raw cauliflower?

Yes you can eat cauliflower raw if you prefer. However, its not always advised as our digestives systems aren't able to breakdown the sugars as well as when its cooked. - You can read more about eating raw vegetables here.

Why should I roast the cauliflower?

This recipe makes the most of the roasted flavour of cauliflower. Boiling cauliflower will cook it, but it won't have the same flavour as roasted cauliflower. Roasting cauliflower not only locks in flavour but also lock in its nutrients.

How to store?

This roasted cauliflower salad is excellent for a bit of meal prep. Once made, place in one large bowl and cover or divide up into sealable containers. Keep in the fridge for up to 3 days. Great for making up on a Sunday and having ready for weekday lunches or as a side for your evening meals.

Roasted Cauliflower salad with quinoa and lemon and herb dressing served in a small bowl with part of the larger mixing bowl visible

🍲 Other salad recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Quinoa and roasted cauliflower salad with lemon & herb dressing, served in a small bowl sat on a blue napkin.
Print

Roasted Cauliflower Salad

Roasted cauliflower salad with a lemon herb dressing. Nutty quinoa mixed with roasted cauliflower and chickpeas. Great for batch cooking and making in advance. This salad is packed full of nutrients and tasty ingredients, with everything you need to fill you up and keep you feeling satisfied for the rest of the day.
Course lunch, Main Course, Salad
Cuisine British
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 286kcal

Ingredients

For the roasted Cauliflower:

  • 1 large cauliflower 700g
  • 1 Small tin of chickpeas 210g tin, 130g drained
  • 1 tablespoon Olive oil
  • Salt and pepper
  • ½ a lemon juiced

For the Quinoa:

  • 160 g dried Quinoa
  • ¼ of a lemon

For the Dressing:

  • 1 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 2 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 2 tablespoon Creme Fraiche
  • 15 g Freshly chopped parsley
  • Pinch of salt
  • ½ a lemon juiced

For the salad:

  • 1 red apple chopped into cm cubes
  • 50 g chopped hazelnuts
  • 15 g freshly chopped parsley
  • Extra lemon wedges to serve

Instructions

  • Pre heat oven to 200 degrees C. Remove the outer green leaves from the cauliflower and use a large knife to chop the florets off the main stem and then chop into smaller bitesized pieces.
  • Place chopped cauliflower florets in a bowl along with the drained chickpeas, oil, salt and pepper and lemon juice.
  • Toss together well with your hands then transfer to a baking tray and bake in the preheated oven for 30 minutes, shuffling the mixture half way through.
  • Whilst the cauliflower is cooking place the quinoa in small saucepan with a wedge of lemon and covered with double the amount water. Place the pan on a medium heat and bring to the boil, then place on a lid and simmer for 15 minutes.
  • With the cauliflower in the oven and the quinoa cooking in the pan, the dressing can be prepared. In a small bowl or container mix together the oil, mustard, creme fraiche, parsley, salt and lemon juice. Chill in the fridge until ready to serve.
  • After the quinoa has been simmering for 15 minutes, take off the heat but do not remove the lid. Set to one side and leave with the lid on for 10 minutes.
  • When the cauliflower is cooked remove from the oven and transfer to a large bowl. Once the quinoa has been sitting for 10 minutes, remove the lid and discard the wedge of lemon. Fluff up the quinoa with a fork and then add to the bowl alongside the cauliflower. Next add the chopped apple, hazelnuts, fresh parsley and half of the dressing.
  • Mix together well then serve with the remaining dressing.

Video

Notes

Why should I roast the cauliflower? This recipe makes the most of the roasted flavour of cauliflower. Boiling cauliflower will cook it, but it won't have the same flavour as roasted cauliflower. Roasting cauliflower not only locks in flavour but also lock in its nutrients.
How to store? This salad is excellent for a bit of meal prep. Once made, place in one large bowl and cover or divide up into sealable containers. Keep in the fridge for up to 3 days. Great for making up on a Sunday and having ready for weekday lunches or as a side for your evening meals.
TIPS:
  • Cut cauliflower up on the tray that you intend to roast it on so that the bits of cauliflower are caught on the tray (makes it quicker and easier when cleaning up).
  • Roughly chop the cauliflower into bit size chunks. Try not to chop into tiny pieces as these can become mushy upon cooking.
  • Chop the apple up just before mixing into the salad to keep it fresh and prevent any browning.
  • The dressing for this recipe takes seconds to put together and really does transform the salad. The more you make - the better!! Place all the dressing ingredients into a small dish and mix together with a spoon...... Super easy and very tasty. I like to mix half of the dressing directly into the salad and leave the other half to drizzle on top.

Nutrition

Serving: 300g | Calories: 286kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 65mg | Potassium: 693mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 451IU | Vitamin C: 69mg | Calcium: 70mg | Iron: 3mg

This post was first published in Jan 2019. Updated in July 2021 with improved recipe and photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Roasted Cauliflower Salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/roasted-cauliflower-salad-lemon-herb-dressing/feed/ 3
Thai Green Prawn Curry https://properfoodie.com/thai-green-prawn-curry/ https://properfoodie.com/thai-green-prawn-curry/#comments Sun, 13 Jun 2021 16:40:11 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=17876 A fragrant and creamy Thai green prawn curry recipe with plump and juicy prawns and nutty edamame beans. Make your own Thai green prawn curry at home with this simple recipe and this easy to make Thai green curry paste. Better than a takeaway any night of the week. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe...

Read More

The post Thai Green Prawn Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

A fragrant and creamy Thai green prawn curry recipe with plump and juicy prawns and nutty edamame beans. Make your own Thai green prawn curry at home with this simple recipe and this easy to make Thai green curry paste. Better than a takeaway any night of the week.

Thai green prawn curry served in a bowl and topped with fresh basil and chillies.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

A creamy and aromatic curry recipe that can be on the table in 30 minutes. Prawn curry is a great option for a healthy meal and its super easy to just throw the prawns in the pan. No need to chop up any raw meats, so it saves you time and the mess.

This Thai green prawn curry is adapted from the Thai recipes I made in 2012 in Thailand when attending the Siam Rice cookery school in Chang Mai, Northern Thailand. I've closely match ingredients where I can and used pre ground spices.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this easy Thai green prawn curry you will need:

Ingredients for making Thai green prawn curry.

Ingredient notes

Coconut milk: The best replacement for coconut milk in terms of consistency and flavour is cream. This can be a little heavy so you can also use yogurt or milk. If using milk I would recommend adding flour as well, as described in the recipe, to help keep the sauce thick.

Fish sauce: Fish sauce is the main seasoning ingredient in Thai cooking and completely transforms the dish. I highly recommend using fish sauce in this recipe for the best flavour. If you can't get hold of any or if you are making a vegetarian curry, you can substitute with soy sauce, Worcestershire sauce or seaweed paste.

Prawns: The prawns can be substitute for your preferred meat or fish. See Thai green chicken curry option. For a vegetarian option replace the prawns with extra veggies and remember to replace the fish sauce with either soy sauce, Worcestershire sauce or seaweed paste.

Thai green curry paste: For best results I recommend making the Thai green curry paste yourself. However, if you don't have time to make the paste the best alternative is to buy a jar of pre-made paste. Bear in mind that the homemade paste can be made in advance and kept in the fridge for up to a week or frozen for up to 3 months.

Edamame beans: Any type of green bean will work well here. I usally opt for soy or green beans. If you want more veg try with tenderstem broccoli, pak choi, baby corn, red onion, finely chopped carrot, aubergine, or courgette..

Flour: The flour is used in this recipe as a thickening agent. If you prefer a Thai green sauce with a thin consistency or if you are making a gluten free version then leave this out. See expert tips below for alternative ways to thicken a curry sauce.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place a wok or large shallow pan onto a medium heat. Add 3 tablespoon of Thai green curry paste and cook for 1 minute to release the flavours.
  2. Next add a can  coconut milk and stir well until fully combined with the paste.
  3. Continue to stir until heated through.
  4. Next add a small amount of cold water to 1 tablespoon of plain flour and mix into a paste. Add this to the sauce and stir in. Continue to heat and stir until sauce starts to thicken. (Skip this step if gluten free and see expert tips below for other ways to thicken the sauce)Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Add the raw king prawns to the green sauce and bring to a gentle simmer. TIP: do not boil as this will cause the sauce to thin out.
  6. Season with lime juice, lime zest, brown sugar and fish sauce (if you're making a vegetarian curry replace the fish sauce with a vegan fish sauce or seaweed paste). Stir well and cook at a simmer for 2-3 minutes or until prawns are bright pink.
  7. Next, add your choice of vegetables (I added edamame beans) and heat for a further 1-2 minutes or until veg is cooked but still crisp and bright green.
  8. Top with fresh basil, fresh chillies and Crispy onions. Dish up and serve with rice.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 5-8.

💭 Expert tips

Extra spiciness: If you like your Thai green curry spicy then add chopped, fresh green chillies during cooking or as a topping. Taste the chillies first so you have a rough idea of how much heat you're adding. Use the smaller, thinner finger chillies for extra heat or use the larger green chillies for a milder flavour.

How to make curry sauce thicker: Use full fat coconut milk in the recipe. The reduced fat versions are more watery and so will ultimately thin out the sauce. Coconut milk can also lose its consistency when boiled rapidly over a prolonged period. So even though reducing a sauce does thicken it, rapidly boiling in this instance will not help.

Other options for thickening the Thai green curry sauce include: Add full fat yogurt to the sauce. Instead of serving rice at the side, mix it directly into your curry whilst still in the pan. If adding vegetables that release water during cooking (e.g. courgettes, mushrooms) roast these in the oven first and then mix into the finished curry. Or add flour to the curry. To avoid flour lumps forming I usually mix 1 tablespoon of flour with a bit of water to form a paste. Then add the flour paste to the curry and mix well.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Is this Thai curry hot?

Out of all the Thai currys, Thai green curry is the hottest, despite the belief that Thai red curry is the hotter of the two. This is mainly down to the chillies used in the paste. Green chillies (particularly green birds eye chilli peppers) tend to be hotter than red. So whether the paste is hot or too spicy for you, is dependent on the ingredients used and the amounts.

What is the difference between Thai red and Thai green curry?

The main difference between Thai green and Thai red curry is the colour and the heat, both of which come from the type of paste used (Thai red curry paste or Thai green curry paste).

How much curry paste is needed to make a curry?

2-3 tablespoon of paste is usually enough when making a curry for 2-4 people.

How to store?

Once made, allow the Thai green curry to completely cool then transfer to a sealable container and keep in the fridge for 2 days or or in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost in the fridge overnight. Reheat in a pan or in the microwave until piping hot throughout.

Is this recipe gluten free?

Yes its gluten free, as long as you don't use the above flour option for thickening. But do always check the packets of the individual ingredients you are using. Generally the main ingredients in this curry are naturally gluten free.

Thai green prawn curry served in a bowl and topped with fresh basil and chillies.

🍛 Other Thai curry recipes:

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Thai green prawn curry served in a bowl and topped with fresh basil and chillies.
Print

Thai Green Prawn Curry

A fragrant and creamy Thai green prawn curry recipe with plump and juicy prawns and nutty edamame beans. Make your own Thai green prawn curry at home with this simple recipe and this easy to make Thai green curry paste. Better than a takeaway any night of the week.
Course Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine Thai, Thailand
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 668kcal

Equipment

  • Wok or large shallow pan

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoon of homemade Thai green paste or shop bought green paste if you’re short on time
  • 400 ml can of full fat coconut milk
  • 1 tablespoon plain flour for thickening - optional do not use if making a gluten free version
  • 250 g king prawns
  • Juice and zest of half a lime
  • 2 teaspoon soft brown sugar
  • Few splashes of fish sauce
  • 150 g frozen edamame beans
  • Basil leaves fresh chillies and crispy onions to serve (optional)
  • Rice to serve optional

Instructions

  • Place a wok or large shallow pan onto a medium heat. Add 3 tablespoon of Thai green curry paste and cook for 1 minute to release the flavours.
  • Next add a can of coconut milk and stir well until fully combined with the paste.
  • Continue to stir until heated through.
  • Next add a small amount of cold water to 1 tablespoon of plain flour and mix into a paste. Add this to the sauce and stir in. Continue to heat and stir until sauce starts to thicken. (Skip this step if gluten free and see expert tips below for other ways to thicken the sauce)
  • Add the raw king prawns to the green sauce and bring to a gentle simmer. TIP: do not boil as this will cause the sauce to thin out.
  • Season with lime juice, lime zest, brown sugar and fish sauce (if you're making a vegetarian curry replace the fish sauce with a vegan fish sauce or seaweed paste). Stir well and cook at a simmer for 2-3 minutes or until prawns are bright pink.
  • Next, add your choice of vegetables (I added edamame beans) and heat for a further 1-2 minutes or until veg is cooked but still crisp and bright green.
  • Top with fresh basil, fresh chillies and Crispy onions. Dish up and serve with rice.

Notes

Extra spiciness: If you like your Thai green curry spicy then add chopped, fresh green chillies during cooking or as a topping. Taste the chillies first so you have a rough idea of how much heat you're adding. The curry paste already contains chillies so if you're not a fan of too much heat then don't go crazy. Use the smaller, thinner finger chillies for extra heat or use the larger green chillies for a milder flavour.
How to make curry sauce thicker: Use full fat coconut milk in the recipe. Add full fat yogurt to the sauce. Instead of serving rice at the side, mix it directly into your curry whilst still in the pan. If adding vegetables that release water during cooking (e.g. courgettes, mushrooms) roast these in the oven first and then mix into the finished curry. Or add flour to the curry. To avoid flour lumps forming I usually mix 1 tablespoon of flour with a bit of water to form a paste. Then add the flour paste to the curry and mix well.
How much curry paste is needed to make a curry? 2-3 tablespoon of paste is usually enough when making a curry for 2-4 people.
How to store? Once made, allow the Thai green curry to completely cool then transfer to a sealable container and keep in the fridge for 2 days or or in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost in the fridge overnight. Reheat in a pan or in the microwave until piping hot throughout.
Is this recipe gluten free? Yes its gluten free, as long as you don't use the above flour option for thickening. But do always check the packets of the individual ingredients you are using. Generally the main ingredients in this curry are naturally gluten free.

Nutrition

Calories: 668kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 39g | Fat: 50g | Saturated Fat: 39g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 315mg | Sodium: 1239mg | Potassium: 894mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 3599IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 304mg | Iron: 12mg

The post Thai Green Prawn Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/thai-green-prawn-curry/feed/ 2
Lamb Pie Recipe https://properfoodie.com/lamb-pies-minted-mash-potato-top/ https://properfoodie.com/lamb-pies-minted-mash-potato-top/#comments Sun, 06 Jun 2021 11:25:28 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=4112 Rich and tender, slow cooked lamb pie encased in crumbly pastry and topped with creamy, horseradish mash potato. The lamb and mint filling is easy to prepare and can be left to cook in the oven or slow cooker for a few hours. This delicious lamb pie recipe is made with a rich, full-flavoured, mint...

Read More

The post Lamb Pie Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Rich and tender, slow cooked lamb pie encased in crumbly pastry and topped with creamy, horseradish mash potato. The lamb and mint filling is easy to prepare and can be left to cook in the oven or slow cooker for a few hours. This delicious lamb pie recipe is made with a rich, full-flavoured, mint gravy and is a great twist on the classic shepherds pie.

A slice of lamb and mint pie with a pastry base and mash potato topping, served on a plate with tender stem broccoli.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This is one of those recipes that you can prepare in advance and then leave to slow cook in the oven whilst you enjoy your day. This incredible lamb pie will fill the house with the most amazing mint gravy aroma and will have you drooling at the oven whilst you wait for the lamb to melt down and the gravy to thicken up.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this Lamb pie recipe you will need:

Ingredients for making lamb pie recipe

Ingredient notes

See recipe card at the bottom for full recipe and ingredients quantities.

Pastry: For ease I've opted for shop bought short crust pastry. If you want to make your own, have a look at my Steak and Ale Pie for an easy shortcrust pastry recipe. For a gluten free version look for gluten free pastry. Double check labels of all ingredients for gluten.

Stock: The stock is the base of the gravy so choose a good quality beef stock. If you can't source any, an oxo cube dissolved in boiling water will do just fine.

Lamb: Leg or shoulder.

Red wine: For the best gravy use good quality red wine. If you would prefer to not add wine then leave it out and make up the quantity with extra beef stock.

Horseradish: Horseradish mash is a great flavour against the rich lamb filling, but its completely optional and just plain mash can be used if preferred.

Flour: The flour is used as a thickening agent. If you are making a gluten free version then opt for a gluten free thickener such as cornflour or potato starch. Double check labels of all ingredients for gluten.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Gently cook onions and garlic
  2. Dust diced lamb with flour, add to the pan and brown.
  3. Add the wine and deglaze the pan. Then gradually add the stock whilst stirring.
  4. Make a gravy paste by adding cold water to the gravy powder. Add the paste, ketchup, Worcestershire sauce and dried mint to the pan. Stir continuously over a gentle heat for 2-3 minutes, ensuring no lumps form.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Transfer to slow cooker (low for 6 hours) or ovenproof dish (150°C Fan/300°F for 4 hours).
  6. Place potatoes into a pan with boiling water and simmer for 45 minutes or until soft.
  7. Line a greased, 21cm (8 inch) pie dish with shortcrust pastry. Store in fridge until needed.
  8. Drain and mash up potatoes with milk, butter and horseradish. Then taste and season.  Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 5-8.
  9. Strain cooked lamb filling through a sieve allowing the gravy to collect in a small pan.  Use a fork to break up and shred the lamb. 
  10. For best results blind bake the pastry. (For blind baking instructions follow link or see notes below). Gently spoon the shredded lamb into the blind baked pastry. Fill to half way up the pastry leaving plenty of room for the mash.
  11. Add the mash over the top of the filling (Piping the mash on is optional but will ensure an even layer of mash on top of your pie).
  12. Cook the pie in the oven at 180°C(Fan)/350°F for 40 minutes. Check after 30 minutes. Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 9-12.
  13. Remove the lamb pie from the oven and heat the pan of strained gravy. Plate up and serve with your choice of veg and hot mint gravy.

💭 Expert tips

  • Keep the pan reasonably hot when making the filling. This will allow the floured lamb to brown nicely and add to the flavour.
  • Bits of flour and meat that stick to the base of the pan will be easily removed when the wine is added (deglaze). Ensure the pan is hot and on the heat still.
  • If you are preparing the mash potatoes the day before, then transfer to a dish, cool and cover with cling film. Store in the fridge overnight. When ready to use, reheat until just warm in either a pan or the microwave. If the mash appears crumbly upon reheating then mash in more milk until smooth.
  • For an even mash topping, transfer the mash to a large pipping bag. Cut the end off to create a wide opening (1.5cm). Pipe balls of mash onto the top of the filling so it evenly covers the surface. Use a fork to pack down and bring the balls of mash together.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What cut of lamb is best for slow cooking?

The best lamb for this recipe is leg or shoulder. Both are great for slow cooking and will become fall apart, tender in the pan.

How do you cook lamb so its tender?

Tough cuts of lamb, such as leg and shoulder, need to be cooked long and slow for the meat to become tender. Cook for at least 2 hours on a low temperature (150°C Fan/300°F). If the meat is still tough cook for longer.

Do you cook shortcrust pastry before adding filling?

To prevent a soggy bottom its always best to blind bake a pastry, particular if you are adding a wet filling. To do this line the pie dish with the pastry then prick all over with a fork. Line the pastry with a scrunched up piece of baking paper. Weight down the paper with dried pasta/baking beans. Bake for 10 minutes at 200°C Fan/400°F, then remove paper and bake for a further 5 minutes.

Can I use rice to blind bake pastry?

Yes dried rice or pulses can be used when blind baking in place of baking beans. dried pasta also works well.

How to store?

The uncooked pie can be wrapped in cling film and either refrigerated for 2-3 days or frozen for up to 3 months. When ready to cook, thoroughly defrost or bring to room temperature. Cook as per the recipe.

Once the pie is cooked any leftovers can be stored in the fridge for 2-3 days. Just leave in the pie dish, ensure the pie is fully cooled and cover in cling film. To reheat, remove from the fridge and bring to room temperature then cover with foil and place in a hot oven for 20 minutes.

Slice of lamb pie with mash topping and pastry bottom, served with mint gravy poured over the top.

🍲 Other comfort food dinner recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A slice of lamb and mint pie with a pastry base and mash potato topping, served on a plate with tender stem broccoli.
Print

Lamb Pie Recipe

Rich and tender, slow cooked lamb pie encased in crumbly pastry and topped with creamy, horseradish mash potato. The lamb and mint filling is easy to prepare and can be left to cook in the oven or slow cooker for a few hours. This delicious lamb pie recipe is made with a rich, full-flavoured, mint gravy and is a great twist on the classic shepherds pie.
Course Dinner, main meal
Prep Time 1 hour
Cook Time 4 hours
Total Time 5 hours
Servings 4 people
Calories 668kcal

Equipment

  • Ovenproof dish or slow cooker
  • 21cm (8 inch) pie dish
  • rolling pin
  • Medium pan for potatoes
  • Masher
  • Small pan for the gravy
  • Large piping bag to pipe on mash (optional)

Ingredients

Lamb pie filling:

  • ½ tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 large onion roughly chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped or minced
  • 600 g diced leg of lamb or lamb shoulder
  • 3 tablespoon plain flour
  • 100 ml red wine
  • 450 ml good quality beef stock
  • 2 tablespoon ketchup
  • 2 teaspoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 2 teaspoon dried mint
  • 4 teaspoon gravy powder

Pastry base:

  • 375 g ready rolled short crust pastry

Potato topping:

  • 750 g potatoes peeled and roughly chopped
  • 4 tablespoon milk
  • 15 g Butter
  • 2 teaspoon horseradish sauce
  • Pinch salt to taste

Instructions

  • Place a large pan on medium heat and add the oil. Once the oil has heated add the chopped onions and garlic and cook gently until soft.
  • Lay out the lamb and dust evenly with flour. When the onions are soft add the floured lamb to the pan and cook until browned all over. The lamb and flour will stick and brown the base of the pan.
  • Next add the wine, which should bubble as it hits the pan and help release any brown flour. Then gradually add the stock and bring to a simmer. Stir frequently allowing the stock to thicken as it combines with the flour.
  • Next place the gravy powder in a small container or cup and stir in enough cold water to form a loose paste. Pour the gravy paste into the pan and stir continuously over a gentle heat for 2-3 minutes, ensuring no lumps form from the gravy powder. Then add the ketchup, Worcestershire sauce and dried mint. Mix well and then remove from the heat.
  • Transfer the entire contents of the pan to your slow cooker or ovenproof dish. Set the slow cooker to low and cook for 6 hours or cook in the oven for 4 hours at 150°C(Fan)/300°F. Once the cooking time is up the meat should fall apart easily. If not, return to the oven or slow cooker for another 30 minutes or until the meat is tender enough to fall apart.
  • Whilst the filling is in the oven peel place the peeled and chopped potatoes into a pan with boiling water and simmer for 45 minutes or until soft.
  • Meanwhile roll out the pastry so its big enough to cover the base and sides of your pie dish (this recipe uses a 21cm (8 inch) pie dish). Grease the pie dish with a bit of soft butter (use kitchen paper to spread evenly over the base) then dust flour over the butter using a sieve. Gently place the pastry over the pie dish (drape over a rolling pin for easier manoeuvring). Gently push the pastry into the corners of the dish (don't stretch), then use a knife to cut off any excess pastry from the edges. Place the pastry lined pie dish in the fridge until you’re ready to put the pie together.
  • When the potatoes are cooked, drain and mash up with the milk, butter and horseradish. Then taste and season. Let the potatoes cool slightly before transferring to a large piping bag, twist the open end of the bag and secure with a peg. Set to one side for later. If you don’t have a piping bag, then leave the mash in the pan and place the lid back on. Set to one side until later. NOTE: if you are preparing the mash potatoes the day before, then transfer to a dish, cover with cling film and store in the fridge overnight. When ready to use reheat until just warm in either a pan or the microwave. If the mash appears crumbly upon reheating then mash in more milk until smooth.
  • Once the lamb is cooked leave to cool slightly then strain through a sieve allowing the gravy to collect in a small pan. Strain in batches placing the meat in a dish as you go. Use a fork to break up and shred the lamb. At this point the strained lamb filling and the gravy can be covered and chilled in the fridge overnight or frozen for up to 3 months. Or add the lamb straight to the pie as per the below instructions.
  • Putting the pie together: Pre heat your oven to 180°C(Fan)/350°F. If your mash, filling and gravy are in the fridge or freezer make sure they have been left on the side with enough time to defrost/come up to room temperature. For best results blind bake the pastry. Gently spoon the shredded lamb into the blind baked pastry. Fill to half way up the pastry leaving plenty of room for the mash.
  • Then take your piping bag of mash and cut the end off to create a wide opening (1.5cm). Pipe balls of mash onto the top of the filling so it evenly covers the filling. Alternatively, spoon the mash over the filling. Use a fork to pack down and bring the balls of mash together. The fork will leave a nice ruffled pattern. (Piping is optional but will ensure a even layer of mash on top of your pie).
  • Place the pie in the centre of the pre heated and bake for 40 minutes. Check after 30 minutes to make sure the mash isn't burning. After the 40 minutes is up the mash should be golden brown and the filling should be just bubbling around the edges.
  • Remove from the oven and allow to cool for 5 minutes. Whilst cooling, return to your pan of drained off gravy. Mix well and then heat gently for 5 minutes. Plate up the pies and serve with your choice of veg and hot mint gravy.

Notes

Pastry: For ease this recipe uses shop bought short crust pastry. If you want to make your own, have a look at my Steak and Ale Pie for an easy shortcrust pastry recipe. For a gluten free version look for gluten free pastry. Double check labels of all ingredients for gluten.
What cut of lamb is best for slow cooking? The best lamb for this recipe is leg or shoulder. Both are great for slow cooking and will become fall apart, tender in the pan.
How do you cook lamb so its tender? Tough cuts of lamb, such as leg and shoulder, need to be cooked long and slow for the meat to become tender. Cook for at least 2 hours on a low temperature (150°C Fan/300°F). If the meat is still tough cook for longer.
Do you cook shortcrust pastry before adding filling? To prevent a soggy bottom its always best to blind bake a pastry, particular if you are adding a wet filling. To do this line the pie dish with the pastry then prick all over with a fork. Line the pastry with a scrunched up piece of baking paper. Weight down the paper with dried pasta/baking beans. Bake for 10 minutes at 200°C Fan (400°F), then remove paper and bake for a further 5 minutes.
Can I use rice to blind bake pastry? Yes dried rice or pulses can be used when blind baking in place of baking beans. dried pasta also works well.
How to store? The uncooked pie can be wrapped in cling film and either refrigerated for 2-3 days or frozen for up to 3 months. When ready to cook, thoroughly defrost or bring to room temperature. Cook as per the recipe.
Once the pie is cooked any leftovers can be stored in the fridge for 2-3 days. Just leave in the pie dish, ensure the pie is fully cooled and cover in cling film. To reheat, remove from the fridge and bring to room temperature then cover with foil and place in a hot oven for 20 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 668kcal | Carbohydrates: 96g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 66mg | Sodium: 974mg | Potassium: 1504mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 143IU | Vitamin C: 42mg | Calcium: 78mg | Iron: 7mg

This post was first published in May 2017. Updated in May 2021 with improved recipe and photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Lamb Pie Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/lamb-pies-minted-mash-potato-top/feed/ 20
Healthy Banana Bread https://properfoodie.com/banana-bread/ https://properfoodie.com/banana-bread/#respond Mon, 10 May 2021 15:06:52 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10739 Easy to make healthy banana bread, baked fresh at home with wholegrain spelt flour, honey and olive oil. The mixture is easy to prepare and can be ready in just 10 minutes! This delicious banana bread bakes with a perfect rise, a moist crumbly finish, and has a scattering of nuts for that extra boost...

Read More

The post Healthy Banana Bread appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Easy to make healthy banana bread, baked fresh at home with wholegrain spelt flour, honey and olive oil. The mixture is easy to prepare and can be ready in just 10 minutes! This delicious banana bread bakes with a perfect rise, a moist crumbly finish, and has a scattering of nuts for that extra boost in healthy fats.

Banana bread loaf on brown crumpled paper with 2 pieces sliced and falling down from the front of the loaf.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

With a simple method that requires only 10 minutes of prep time, this is a great dessert for when you have mouths to feed and time to save! Theres no need for any mixers and theres certainly no concerns over adding eggs too quickly or mixtures splitting. Just mix together the ingredients, pour into a lined loaf tin and bake. Super simple.

The ingredients in this recipe are also super healthy and include honey instead of refined sugar, oil instead of butter, and a mix of ground almonds and organic wholegrain spelt flour instead of plain white flour. This healthy banana bread also has an extra egg white and a teaspoon of organic apple Cider Vinegar. The end product: a wholesome, flavourful, nutritious and no mess banana bread treat.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this healthy banana bread recipe you will need:

Ingredients needed to make Banana Bread.

Ingredient notes

Bananas: Use bananas that are ripe and soft. Bananas that are underripe will be harder to mash up and less sweet

Ground cinnamon and nutmeg: spices work wonderfully well in banana bread and add a warming sweet and woody flavour. However, you can leave these out or replace with your preferred spices.

Apple cider vinegar: If you can't get hold of any replace with lemon juice.

Wholegrain spelt flour: Any type of wholegrain flour will work here. If you prefer you can replace with your preferred type of flour (gluten free, rye, almond). For a standard banana bread loaf opt for plain flour.

Ground almonds: If you don't have ground almonds or would prefer not use, then replace with the same amount of flour.

Toppings: Topping options could include nuts and seeds, dried banana chips, pieces of fresh banana or a whole banana sliced in half length ways and positioned on top with the inside facing upwards. Place all topping on the top of the cake mix before being baked.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by pre-heating the oven to 165 degrees C. Then lightly grease a loaf tin and line with strip of greaseproof paper (should be as wide as the length of the tin) (Paper just needs to cover the base and the 2 long inner sides). Peel the bananas and place in a large mixing bowl. Use a fork to mash the bananas to a rough pulp (no need for the banana to be pureed as a few lumpy pieces adds to the texture and flavour).
  2. Next add in all the other wet ingredients: 6tbsp honey, 2 eggs and one egg white, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract, 1 teaspoon apple cider vinegar (or lemon juice), and 3 tablespoon of olive oil. Whisk together until fully combined.
  3. Next add all the dry ingredients, apart from the flour, to the wet mixture: 50g ground almonds, 1 teaspoon cinnamon, ½ teaspoon nutmeg, 1 teaspoon bicarbonate of soda. Use a rubber spatula or wooden spoon to gently stir together.
  4. Lastly add the wholegrain spelt flour (or other variety of wholegrain flour) to the bowl and fold in gently using the spatula.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Carefully pour the banana bread mixture into the lined loaf tin and sprinkle over the flaked almonds and chopped walnuts. Alternative fold the nuts into the mixture before transferring to the tin. Place the loaf tin in the centre of the pre-heated oven. Bake for 50 minutes until golden brown and a inserted skewer comes out clean.
  6. Remove from the oven and allow to stand for a minute or two before removing from the tin and placing on a cooling rack. When completely cool, remove the greaseproof paper, slice and serve.Collage of 2 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 5-6.

💭 Expert tips

  • For gluten free banana bread replace the wholegrain flour with gluten free flour and check the labels of all other ingredients for any traces of gluten.
  • Use the nuts as a topping or stir into the cake mixture before pouring into the tin. Or if you prefer leave out altogether.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can bananas be too ripe to use in this recipe?

If the banana skins are completely black they may well be off. In which case its probably not worth using them. I have used bananas that have skins ranging from pale yellow to brown spotty and find that these always work well. Bananas with brown spotty skins will be softer and so will mash up easier, but the taste isn't really affected.  Bananas with green skins are too underripe and will be very hard and less sweet. To speed up the ripening process, loosely wrap the bananas in a brown paper bag.

What nuts go well with banana bread?

My favourite nut to go with banana is the walnut. Banana and walnut is a classic combination of sweet vs bitter and smooth vs crunchy, which is often found in the banana loaf recipe. Peanut butter and banana is obviously another well know classic combination. This salty nut-butter can be used to spread onto a slice of the finished loaf. Other nuts you could try: chopped hazelnuts, pistachio nuts or pecan nuts.

What else can you add to banana bread?

To make this recipe your own, try adding different toppings or mix the toppings into the banana bread mixture. Or why not try mixing in nutella or other nut butters. If you're not a massive fan of nuts you could try blueberries, chopped dates, chocolate chips, dried banana, sultanas, black sesame seeds, sunflower seeds, orange peel or lime zest.

How to store?

Banana bread will keep well and stay moist for at least 3-4 days if stored correctly. Wrap the banana bread in two layers of cling film or foil. Then store in a sealed, container at room temperature.

Loaf of healthy banana bread being sliced in to.

🍨 Other fruity dessert recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Print

Healthy Banana Bread

Easy to make healthy banana bread, baked fresh at home with wholegrain spelt flour, honey and olive oil. The mixture is easy to prepare and can be ready in just 10 minutes! This delicious banana bread bakes with a perfect rise, a moist crumbly finish, and has a scattering of nuts for that extra boost in healthy fats.
Course afternoon tea, Breakfast, Dessert, party food, Snack
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 10 slices
Calories 238kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Whisk
  • Rubber spatula or spoon
  • Loaf tin lined with greaseproof paper
  • Cooling rack

Ingredients

  • 2 Large ripe bananas or 3 small
  • 6 tablespoon Honey
  • 2 Large eggs
  • 1 Egg white
  • 1 teaspoon Vanilla extract
  • 1 teaspoon Apple cider vinegar or lemon juice
  • 3 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 50 g Ground almonds
  • 1 teaspoon Ground cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 1 teaspoon Bicarbonate of soda
  • 175 g Wholegrain spelt flour or any other variety of wholegrain flour
  • 10 g Flaked almonds Topping - optional
  • 25 g Chopped walnuts Topping - optional

Instructions

  • Start by pre-heating the oven to 165 degrees C. Then lightly grease a loaf tin and line with strip of greaseproof paper (should be as wide as the length of the tin) (Paper just needs to cover the base and the 2 long inner sides). Peel the bananas and place in a large mixing bowl. Use a fork to mash the bananas to a rough pulp (no need for the banana to be pureed as a few lumpy pieces adds to the texture and flavour).
  • Next add in all the other wet ingredients: 6 tablespoon honey, 2 eggs and one egg white, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract, 1 teaspoon apple cider vinegar (or lemon juice), and 3 tablespoon of olive oil. Whisk together until fully combined.
  • Next add all the dry ingredients, apart from the flour, to the wet mixture: 50g ground almonds, 1 teaspoon cinnamon, ½ teaspoon nutmeg, 1 teaspoon bicarbonate of soda. Use a rubber spatula or wooden spoon to gently stir together.
  • Lastly add the wholegrain spelt flour (or other variety of wholegrain flour) to the bowl and fold in gently using the spatula.
  • Carefully pour the banana bread mixture into the lined loaf tin and sprinkle over the flaked almonds and chopped walnuts. Alternative fold the nuts into the mixture before transferring to the tin. Place the loaf tin in the centre of the pre-heated oven. Bake for 50 minutes until golden brown and a inserted skewer comes out clean.
  • Remove from the oven and allow to stand for a minute or two before removing from the tin and placing on a cooling rack. When completely cool, remove the greaseproof paper, slice and serve.

Video

Notes

Bananas: Use bananas that are ripe and soft. Bananas that are underripe will be harder to mash up and less sweet
Ground cinnamon and nutmeg: spices work wonderfully well in banana bread and add a warming sweet and woody flavour. However, you can leave these out or replace with your preferred spices.
Apple cider vinegar: If you can't get hold of any replace with lemon juice.
Wholegrain spelt flour: Any type of wholegrain flour will work here. If you prefer you can replace with your preferred type of flour (gluten free, rye, almond). For a standard banana bread loaf opt for plain flour.
Ground almonds: If you don't have ground almonds or would prefer not use, then replace with the same amount of flour.
Gluten free banana bread: For gluten free banana bread replace the wholegrain flour with gluten free flour and check the labels of all other ingredients for any traces of gluten.
What other ingredients you can add to banana bread? To add a boost of flavour to your banana bread try topping with or mixing in walnuts, chopped hazelnuts, pistachio nuts or pecan nuts. Or why not try mixing in nutella or peanut butter. If you're not a massive fan of nuts you could try blueberries, chopped dates, chocolate chips, dried banana, fresh banana sliced in half, sultanas, black sesame seeds, sunflower seeds, orange peel or lime zest.
How to store? Banana bread will keep well and stay moist for at least 3-4 days if stored correctly. Wrap the banana bread in two layers of cling film or foil. Then store in a sealed, container at room temperature.

Nutrition

Serving: 75g | Calories: 238kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 37mg | Sodium: 131mg | Potassium: 143mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 73IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 26mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in July 2019. Updated in May 2021 with improved step by step instructions and expert tips.

Please note that this post contains affiliate links to products I am recommending (apple cider vinegar and wholegrain spelt flour), which means if you click this link and then go on to purchase the product, I will receive a small percentage – this will not affect the amount you pay. I will only ever link to and promote products that I have tried and tested myself.

The post Healthy Banana Bread appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/banana-bread/feed/ 0
Thai Green Curry Recipe https://properfoodie.com/thai-green-curry/ https://properfoodie.com/thai-green-curry/#comments Sat, 27 Mar 2021 00:20:17 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=6663 A fragrant and creamy Thai green curry recipe with tender chunks of chicken and crunchy green vegetables. Make your own Thai green chicken curry at home with this simple recipe and this easy to make Thai green curry paste. Better than a takeaway any night of the week. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe A...

Read More

The post Thai Green Curry Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

A fragrant and creamy Thai green curry recipe with tender chunks of chicken and crunchy green vegetables. Make your own Thai green chicken curry at home with this simple recipe and this easy to make Thai green curry paste. Better than a takeaway any night of the week.

A bowl of Thai green chicken curry with mangetout, green coconut sauce and topped with sliced green chillies and crispy onions.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

A creamy and aromatic curry recipe that can be on the table in 30 minutes. Perfectly tender chicken coated in coconut curry sauce and finished with fiery chillies and crispy onions. Simple and delicious.

Thai green curry is also great on a week night when you want something quick and tasty, that doesn't take too much effort. This particular recipe is a Thai chicken curry but feel free to replace the meat with your preferred choice or with extra vegetables.

This Thai green chicken curry recipe is adapted from the Thai recipes I made in 2012 in Thailand when attending the Siam Rice cookery school in Chang Mai, Northern Thailand. I've closely match ingredients where I can and used pre ground spices.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this easy Thai green curry recipe you will need:

Ingredients needed to make Thai green curry.

Ingredient notes

Coconut milk: The best replacement for coconut milk in terms of consistency and flavour is cream. This can be a little heavy so you can also use yogurt or milk. If using milk I would recommend adding flour as well, as described in the recipe, to help keep the sauce thick.

Fish sauce: Fish sauce is the main seasoning ingredient in Thai cooking and completely transforms the dish. I highly recommend using fish sauce in this recipe for the best flavour. If you can't get hold of any or if you are making a vegetarian curry, you can substitute with soy sauce, Worcestershire sauce or seaweed paste.

Chicken: The chicken can be substitute for your preferred meat or fish. Or try a Thai green prawn curry. For a vegetarian option replace the chicken with extra veggies and remember to replace the fish sauce with either soy sauce, Worcestershire sauce or seaweed paste.

Thai green curry paste: For best results I recommend making the Thai green curry paste yourself. However, if you don't have time to make the paste the best alternative is to buy a jar of pre-made paste. Bear in mind that the homemade paste can be made in advance and kept in the fridge for up to a week or frozen for up to 3 months.

Mangetout: I love the crisp and fresh flavour of mangetout in this creamy Thai curry. However, this can be substituted for your preferred veg. Try with tenderstem broccoli, pak choi, baby corn, red onion, finely chopped carrot, aubergine, courgette or green beans.

Flour: The flour is used in this recipe as a thickening agent. If you prefer a Thai green sauce with a thin consistency or if you are making a gluten free version then leave this out. See expert tips below for alternative ways to thicken a curry sauce.

Chillies: The chillies are used as a topping to the curry and will add extra heat to the dish. Taste the chillies first so you have a rough idea of how much heat you're adding. The curry paste already contains chillies so if you're not a fan of too much heat then don't go crazy with the extra chillies. Use the smaller, thinner finger chillies for extra heat or use the larger green chillies for a milder flavour. I like to use red chillies just for the contrasting colours on the top.

Coriander, basil and onions: This are all suggested toppings and are optional.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place a wok or large shallow pan onto a medium heat. Add 3 tablespoon of Thai green curry paste and cook for 1 minute to release the flavours.
  2. Next add a can a coconut milk and stir well until fully combined with the paste.
  3. Continue to stir until heated through.
  4. Next add a small amount of cold water to 1 tablespoon of plain flour and mix into a paste. Add this to the sauce and stir in. Continue to heat and stir until sauce starts to thicken. (Skip this step if gluten free and see expert tips below for other ways to thicken the sauce)Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Add the raw, cubed chicken to the green sauce and bring to a gentle simmer. TIP: do not boil as this will cause the sauce to thin out.
  6. Season with lime juice, lime zest, brown sugar and fish sauce (if you're making a vegetarian curry replace the fish sauce with a vegan fish sauce or seaweed paste). Stir well and cook at a simmer for 2-3 minutes or until chicken is cooked through.
  7. Next, add your choice of vegetables (I added mangetout) and heat for a further 1-2 minutes or until veg is cooked but still crisp and bright green.
  8. Top with fresh basil, coriander, fresh chillies and Crispy onions. Dish up and serve with rice.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 5-8.

💭 Expert tips

Extra spiciness: If you like your Thai green curry spicy then add chopped, fresh green chillies during cooking.

How to make curry sauce thicker: Use full fat coconut milk in the recipe. The reduced fat versions are more watery and so will ultimately thin out the sauce. Coconut milk can also lose its consistency when boiled rapidly over a prolonged period. So even though reducing a sauce does thicken it, rapidly boiling in this instance will not help. When making this recipe, ensure that the the finished Thai green curry is heated gently until just boiling before serving. 

Other options for thickening the Thai green curry sauce include:

  1. Add full fat yogurt, but be aware that this will reduce the spiciness of the dish, so you may need to add more chillies at the same time. Only add yogurt right at the end of cooking - too much heat and the yogurt will curdle. Take the Thai green curry off the heat and stir in enough yogurt to reach your desired consistency.
  2. Instead of serving rice at the side, mix it directly into your curry whilst still in the pan. Then serve.
  3. If adding vegetables that release water during cooking (e.g. courgettes, mushrooms) roast these in the oven first and then mix into the finished curry.
  4. Add flour to the curry. To avoid flour lumps forming I usually mix 1 tablespoon of flour with a bit of water to form a paste. Then add the flour paste to the curry and mix well. For best results add the flour paste before its heated up to much. Then stir continually until the sauce thickens and the flour is 'cooked out'.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Is this Thai curry hot?

Out of all the Thai currys, Thai green curry is the hottest, despite the belief that Thai red curry is the hotter of the two. This is mainly down to the chillies used in the paste. Green chillies (particularly green birds eye chilli peppers) tend to be hotter than red. So whether the paste is hot or too spicy for you, is dependent on the ingredients used and the amounts. Try the paste before adding and if necessary balance out with yogurt or cream. If a milder curry is much more your thing then try Panang curry, or Massaman curry.

What is the difference between Thai red and Thai green curry?

The main difference between Thai green and Thai red curry is the colour and the heat, both of which come from the type of paste used (Thai red curry paste or Thai green curry paste). Substituting one paste for other will ultimately dictate the type of curry you end up making.

How much curry paste is needed to make a curry?

2-3 tablespoon of paste is usually enough when making a curry for 2-4 people.

How to store?

Once made, allow the Thai green curry to completely cool then transfer to a sealable container and keep in the fridge for 2 days or or in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost in the fridge overnight. Reheat in a pan or in the microwave until piping hot throughout.

Is this recipe gluten free?

Yes its gluten free, as long as you don't use the above flour option for thickening. But do always check the packets of the individual ingredients you are using. Generally the main ingredients in this curry are naturally gluten free.

Thai green curry recipe in a large pan topped with sliced red chillies, basil leaves, coriander leaves and crispy onions

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A bowl of Thai green chicken curry with mangetout, green coconut sauce and topped with sliced green chillies and crispy onions.
Print

Thai Green Curry Recipe

A fragrant and creamy Thai green curry recipe with tender chunks of chicken and crunchy green vegetables. Make your own Thai green chicken curry at home with this simple recipe and this easy to make Thai green curry paste. Better than a takeaway any night of the week.
Course Dinner, Main Course, main meal
Cuisine Thai, Thailand
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 763kcal

Equipment

  • Wok or large shallow pan

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoon of homemade Thai green paste or shop bought green paste if you’re short on time
  • 400 ml can of full fat coconut milk
  • 1 tablespoon plain flour for thickening - optional (do not use if making a gluten free version)
  • 500 g Chicken breast chopped into bitesize cubes
  • Juice and zest of half a lime
  • 2 teaspoon soft brown sugar
  • Few splashes of fish sauce
  • 125 g Mangetout
  • Basil leaves fresh coriander, fresh chillies and crispy onions to serve (optional)
  • Rice to serve optional

Instructions

  • Place a wok or large shallow pan onto a medium heat. Add 3 tablespoon of Thai green curry paste and cook for 1 minute to release the flavours.
  • Next add a can a coconut milk and stir well until fully combined with the paste.
  • Continue to stir until heated through.
  • Next add a small amount of cold water to 1 tablespoon of plain flour and mix into a paste. Add this to the sauce and stir in. Continue to heat and stir until sauce starts to thicken. (Skip this step if making a gluten free version and see expert tips below for other ways to thicken the sauce).
  • Add the raw, cubed chicken to the green sauce and bring to a gentle simmer. TIP: do not boil as this will cause the sauce to thin out.
  • Season with lime juice, lime zest, brown sugar and fish sauce (if you're making a vegetarian curry replace the fish sauce with a vegan fish sauce or seaweed paste). Stir well and cook at a simmer for 2-3 minutes or until chicken is cooked through.
  • Next, add your choice of vegetables (I added mangetout) and heat for a further 1-2 minutes or until veg is cooked but still crisp and bright green.
  • Top with fresh basil, coriander, fresh chillies and Crispy onions. Dish up and serve with rice.

Video

Notes

Coconut milk: The best replacement for coconut milk in terms of consistency and flavour is cream. This can be a little heavy so you can also use yogurt or milk. If using milk I would recommend adding flour as well, as described in the recipe, to help keep the sauce thick.
Fish sauce: Fish sauce is the main seasoning ingredient in Thai cooking and completely transforms the dish. I highly recommend using fish sauce in this recipe for the best flavour. If you can't get hold of any or if you are making a vegetarian curry, you can substitute with soy sauce, Worcestershire sauce or seaweed paste.
Thai green curry paste: For best results I recommend making the Thai green curry paste yourself. However, if you don't have time to make the paste the best alternative is to buy a jar of pre-made paste. Bear in mind that the homemade paste can be made in advance and kept in the fridge for up to a week or frozen for up to 3 months.
Flour: The flour is used in this recipe as a thickening agent. If you prefer a Thai green sauce with a thin consistency or if you are making a gluten free version then leave this out. See expert tips below for alternative ways to thicken a curry sauce.
Extra spiciness: If you like your Thai green curry spicy then add chopped, fresh green chillies during cooking.
How to make curry sauce thicker: Use full fat coconut milk in the recipe. The reduced fat versions are more watery and so will ultimately thin out the sauce. Coconut milk can also lose its consistency when boiled rapidly over a prolonged period. So even though reducing a sauce does thicken it, rapidly boiling in this instance will not help. When making this recipe, ensure that the the finished Thai green curry is heated gently until just boiling before serving. 
Other options for thickening the Thai green curry sauce include:
  1. Add full fat yogurt, but be aware that this will reduce the spiciness of the dish, so you may need to add more chillies at the same time. Only add yogurt right at the end of cooking - too much heat and the yogurt will curdle. Take the Thai green curry off the heat and stir in enough yogurt to reach your desired consistency.
    Instead of serving rice at the side, mix it directly into your curry whilst still in the pan. Then serve.
  2. If adding vegetables that release water during cooking (e.g. courgettes, mushrooms) roast these in the oven first and then mix into the finished curry.
  3. Add flour to the curry. To avoid flour lumps forming I usually mix 1 tablespoon of flour with a bit of water to form a paste. Then add the flour paste to the curry and mix well. For best results add the flour paste before its heated up to much. Then stir continually until the sauce thickens and the flour is 'cooked out'.
Storage: Once made, allow the Thai green curry to completely cool then transfer to a sealable container and keep in the fridge for 2 days or or in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost in the fridge overnight. Reheat in a pan or in the microwave until piping hot throughout.

Nutrition

Serving: 400g | Calories: 763kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 60g | Fat: 51g | Saturated Fat: 40g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 160mg | Sodium: 556mg | Potassium: 1517mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 4354IU | Vitamin C: 46mg | Calcium: 115mg | Iron: 10mg

This post was first published in May 2018. Updated in March 2021 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step photos and expert tips

The post Thai Green Curry Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/thai-green-curry/feed/ 4
Chimichurri Steak Platter https://properfoodie.com/steak-platter-chimichurri/ https://properfoodie.com/steak-platter-chimichurri/#comments Wed, 17 Feb 2021 18:02:54 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2220 Chimichurri steak platter recipe! Pan fried steak sliced into tender, juicy strips and served with fragrant chimichurri sauce. Make this steak platter and fabulous Argentinian dressing in just over 30 minutes. Perfect for a Saturday night in with a posh steak dinner. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe This easy meal is great for a...

Read More

The post Chimichurri Steak Platter appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Chimichurri steak platter recipe! Pan fried steak sliced into tender, juicy strips and served with fragrant chimichurri sauce. Make this steak platter and fabulous Argentinian dressing in just over 30 minutes. Perfect for a Saturday night in with a posh steak dinner.

Slices of medium-rare steak positioned over a pile of cubed rosemary potatoes with a herb and chilli dressing being spooned over the top.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This easy meal is great for a Saturday night in with a bottle of red and a good film. I love to have this dish with a good helping of rosemary potatoes and an avocado salad on the side. Its a lot of food, but sometimes a massive feast on a weekend is just what I need. If I'm going to eat big this is the way I like to do it - plenty of protein and lots of interesting flavours.

No need to peel the potatoes, just roughly chop, season and pop in the oven. The herby chimichurri dressing takes just 5 minutes to make. Throw all the ingredients into a blender or grab a knife and get chopping! It also keeps really well in the fridge, so its no problem to make ahead of time. The juicy steak is cooked simply in a pan and just 10 minutes before you're ready to eat.

This is also a great dish if you're cooking for a few people. Just pile everything on to a board to create a steak sharing platter and let people help themselves!

🥘 Ingredients

To make this chimichurri steak platter recipe you will need:

Ingredients needed to make chimichurri steak platter.

Ingredient notes

Steak: This recipe uses rump steak but you could also use sirloin, ribeye, fillet or flat iron. Fillet is very lean and tender and so tends to be the most expensive. - Great for a special occasion. For more details on different steak cuts have a look at this page on choosing the right steak or this guide to different beef cuts.

Herbs: Always use fresh herbs in chimichurri sauce for full flavours and bold colours.

Chilli: Always taste the chilli to test the level of heat before adding. For more heat add in smaller green chillies.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Preheat the oven to 200°C (400°F) and make sure steaks are out of the fridge and coming up to room temperature. Prepare the potatoes by slicing into 2cm cubes (skins can be left on). Place cubed potatoes in a bowl and add 1 tablespoon oil and 1 teaspoon dried rosemary. Toss together and mix well then transfer onto a baking tray. Bake in the oven for 30-35 minutes until golden brown. Check and turn half way through cooking.
  2. While the rosemary potatoes are cooking, prepare the chimichurri dressing. Finely chop the fresh parsley, fresh coriander, basil leaves, red chilli and garlic. Place all the chopped ingredients on the same chopping board.
  3. Use the knife blade to start to bring together all the chopped ingredients. Continue to chop whilst mixing the herbs until everything is well minced together.
  4. Transfer the chopped herbs, chilli and garlic to a small bowl and add 4 tablespoon olive oil and 2 tablespoon red wine vinegar.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Mix the oil and vinegar into the herbs. Add more oil to loosen the sauce further if necessary. Cover and chill in the fridge until ready to serve.
  6. Start to prepare the rump steaks when there is 15 minutes left on the timer for the rosemary potatoes. Place a large griddle pan or frying pan on a high heat. Prep the steak by drizzling both sides with olive oil and seasoning well. Then use your fingers to rub the oil and seasoning into the meat.
  7. Once the pan is hot place the rump steaks in the pan, they should sizzle immediately. Leave to cook on the first side for 3-4 minutes.
  8. Turn over and cook for 2 minutes on the other side (rare – medium), adjust the time according to your preferences). Once cooked transfer to a chopping board and cover with foil. Allow to rest for 5 minutes.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this recipe for steps 5-8.
  9. Slice the cooked steak and serve alongside the rosemary potatoes and chimichurri dressing.

💭 Expert tips

  • Remove steaks from the fridge at least an hour before you cook them so that they are at room temperature.
  • Use fresh herbs for the chimichurri sauce to make sure the dressing is full of flavour and colour
  • To save time whiz up the chimichurri ingredients in a small food processor or blender rather than chopping. However, chopping is the best way to really experience all the fantastic aromas!

❓ Frequently asked questions

Whats the best steak to use for chimichurri steak?

When pan frying a steak I always opt for rump steak. Rump tends to be marbled with more fat so resulting in a rich and full flavoured steak. Rump steaks are also bigger and better value (and better for feeding hungry mouths!).

How to cook the perfect steak?

Steak should to be cooked when you want to eat it and not before. It should also be given all the time and attention it needs. But really it doesn't need that long, 15 minutes max and you have yourself a beautiful steak. The recipe below gives the times for a rare-medium steak. You can adjust this depending on how well done you like your meat. (2 mins on each side for rare and 6 mins on each side for well done).

For a perfect steak make sure the pan is hot and that the the rump steaks are seasoned and rubbed with oil. Once in the pan try not to touch the steaks or move around until you are ready to turn. Check how well-done they are by pushing on the meat with your finger, the firmer the meat the more cooked in the middle. Always remember to rest the steaks for at least 5 minutes before slicing and serving.

Can this recipe be made in advance?

Its quite straight forward to make this chimichurri steak, which makes it a great dish for a lazy weekend. Most of this recipe can be prepped in the morning leaving you with a couple of things to do later on when you're ready to eat.

The chimichurri sauce can be made in advance and refrigerated. The potatoes can be chopped and seasoned ready for the oven. The steak can be brought out of the fridge an hour or two before cooking in order to bring up to room temperature.  If you really want to save time later you could bake the cubed potatoes, cool and refrigerate, and then just reheat in the oven for 5 minutes or so when you're ready for them.

What to serve with Chimichurri steak?

As well as serving this steak platter with some delicious rosemary potatoes or Foil Pack Potatoes, I also love to serve a massive bowl of Mango Avocado Salad on the side. The creamy avocado flesh goes so well with the meat and spicy chimichurri dip. If you decide to have the avocado salad make you cut the avocado just before you serve the meal. This will keep the avocado nice and fresh and stop it turning brown. Or use another one of my easy avocado recipes as an accompaniment.

Slices of rump steak cooked medium rare and served over cubed potatoes with a chimichurri dressing drizzled over the top.

🍖 Other steak recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Slices of medium-rare steak positioned over a pile of cubed rosemary potatoes with a herb and chilli dressing being spooned over the top.
Print

Chimichurri Steak Platter

Chimichurri steak platter recipe! Pan fried steak sliced into tender, juicy strips and served with fragrant chimichurri sauce. Make this steak platter and fabulous Argentinian dressing in just over 30 minutes. Perfect for a Saturday night in with a posh steak dinner.
Course Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine argentinian, spanish
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 889kcal

Equipment

  • Mixing bowl
  • Knife
  • chopping board
  • Griddle pan

Ingredients

For the steaks

  • 2 Rump steaks
  • 1 tablespoon oil
  • Pinch salt

For the potatoes

  • 2 large potatoes
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon dried rosemary
  • Pinch salt

For the chimichirri dressing

  • 20 g fresh parsley
  • 10 g fresh coriander
  • 10 g basil leaves
  • 1 garlic clove
  • 1 red chilli
  • 4 tablespoon oil
  • 2 tablespoon red wine vinegar

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 200°C (400°F) and make sure steaks are out of the fridge and coming up to room temperature. Prepare the potatoes by slicing into 2cm cubes (skins can be left on). Place the cubed potatoes in a bowl and add 1 tablespoon oil and 1 teaspoon dried rosemary. Toss together and mix well then transfer onto a baking tray. Bake in the oven for 30-35 minutes until golden brown. Check and turn half way through cooking.
  • While the rosemary potatoes are cooking, prepare the chimichurri dressing. Finely chop the fresh parsley, fresh coriander, basil leaves, red chilli and garlic. Place all the chopped ingredients on the same chopping board.
  • Use the knife blade to start to bring together all the chopped ingredients. Continue to chop whilst mixing the herbs until everything is well minced together.
  • Transfer the chopped herbs, chilli and garlic to a small bowl and add 4 tablespoon olive oil and 2 tablespoon red wine vinegar.
  • Mix the oil and vinegar into the herbs. Add more oil to loosen the sauce further if necessary. Cover and chill in the fridge until ready to serve.
  • Start to prepare steak when there is 15 minutes left on the timer for the rosemary potatoes. Place a large griddle pan or frying pan on a high heat. Prep the rump steak by drizzling both sides with olive oil and seasoning well. Then use your fingers to rub the oil and seasoning into the meat.
  • Once the pan is hot place the rump steaks in the pan, they should sizzle immediately. Leave to cook on the first side for 3-4 minutes.
  • Turn over and cook for 2 minutes on the other side (rare – medium), adjust the time according to your preferences. Once cooked transfer to a chopping board and cover with foil. Allow to rest for 5 minutes.
  • Slice the steak and serve alongside the rosemary potatoes and chimichurri dressing.

Notes

Expert tips:
  • Remove steaks from fridge at least an hour before you cook them so that they are at room temperature.
  • Use fresh herbs for the chimichurri sauce to make sure the dressing is full of flavour and colour.
  • To save time whiz up the chimichurri ingredients in a small food processor or blender rather than chopping. However, chopping is a best way to really experience all the fantastic aromas!
 
Whats the best steak to use for this recipe? When pan frying a steak I always opt for rump steak. Rump tends to be marbled with more fat so resulting in a rich and full flavoured steak. Rump steaks are also bigger and better value (and better for feeding hungry mouths!).
How to cook the perfect steak? The recipe above gives the times for a rare-medium steak. You can adjust this depending on how well done you like your meat. (2 mins on each side for rare and 6 mins on each side for well done).

For a perfect steak make sure the pan is hot and that the the rump steaks are seasoned and rubbed with oil. Once in the pan try not to touch the steaks or move around until you are ready to turn. Check how well-done they are by pushing on the meat with your finger, the firmer the meat the more cooked in the middle. Always remember to rest the steaks for at least 5 minutes before slicing and serving.
Can this recipe be made in advance? The chimichurri sauce can be made in advance and refrigerated. The potatoes can be chopped and seasoned ready for the oven. The steak can be brought out of the fridge an hour or two before cooking in order to bring up to room temperature.  If you really want to save time later you could bake the cubed potatoes, cool and refrigerate, and then just reheat in the oven for 5 minutes or so when you're ready for them.
What to serve with Chimichurri steak? As well as serving this steak platter with some delicious rosemary potatoes or Foil Pack Potatoes, I also love to serve a massive bowl of Mango Avocado Salad on the side. The creamy avocado flesh goes so well with the steak and spicy chimichurri dip. If you decide to have the avocado salad make you cut the avocado just before you serve the meal. This will keep the avocado nice and fresh and stop it turning brown. Or use another one of my easy avocado recipes as an accompaniment.

Nutrition

Serving: 1steak with dressing and potatoes | Calories: 889kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 56g | Fat: 53g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 138mg | Sodium: 156mg | Potassium: 2006mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1664IU | Vitamin C: 98mg | Calcium: 127mg | Iron: 7mg

This post was first published in August 2016. Updated in February 2021 with an improved recipe, new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

If you would like to access the original recipe you can do so here: Original Steak and Chimichurri recipe 2016

The post Chimichurri Steak Platter appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/steak-platter-chimichurri/feed/ 2
Salmon and Prawn Linguine https://properfoodie.com/salmon-prawn-linguine-spiralized-courgette/ https://properfoodie.com/salmon-prawn-linguine-spiralized-courgette/#respond Mon, 15 Feb 2021 15:50:53 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1895 Impress friends and family by serving up this full flavoured salmon and prawn linguine recipe for dinner. Made with a lemon and cream sauce and topped with fresh dill and chilli flakes, every mouthful of this creamy salmon pasta recipe is a slurp-ful delight! Its a fantastic way to fit in a portion of oily...

Read More

The post Salmon and Prawn Linguine appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Impress friends and family by serving up this full flavoured salmon and prawn linguine recipe for dinner. Made with a lemon and cream sauce and topped with fresh dill and chilli flakes, every mouthful of this creamy salmon pasta recipe is a slurp-ful delight!

A bowl of linguine in a creamy sauce with salmon and prawns

Its a fantastic way to fit in a portion of oily fish and to get dinner on the table in less than 30 minutes.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This easy to make salmon linguine recipe is a great option for a healthy pasta dish. It uses a light yet full flavoured creme fraiche and lemon sauce and contains plenty of good fats and protein from the salmon fillets.

This fuss free pasta dish is quick to get on the table and is a filling but healthy recipe for the family. For more dinner inspiration have a look at my dinner ideas for two.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this salmon and prawn linguine recipe at home you will need:

Ingredients needed to make salmon and prawn linguine.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Fish: If you prefer you can choose something different to salmon. Try with trout, sea bass, tuna or cod. Or alternatively leave out the salmon completely and double up the prawns to make this a prawn linguine.

Prawns: This recipe uses the larger king prawns and cooks them from raw. Alternatively, substitute for cooked king prawns and add these in right at the end of the recipe before serving.

White wine: White wine adds to the flavour of the sauce, however, you can leave this out if you prefer.

Pasta: This recipe uses linguine pasta, but it would also work really well with spaghetti, papardelle or tagliatelle.

Creme Fraiche: I prefer to use creme fraiche rather than cream as it is lighter and its slight sour flavour helps to cut through the richness of the sauce. Creme fraiche is also less likely to curdle and so produces a silky smooth sauce.

Flour: This is not in the ingredients list, but its an option to use if you would like to thicken the sauce. After the creme fraiche is added, check the consistency of the sauce, if you would like it thicker then add in 1 tablespoon flour. Mix the flour with a bit of cold water to create a paste and then pour in to the pan. Heat gently and stir continuously until the sauce thickens.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by cooking the linguine according to the instructions on the packet. Once cooked, drain and cool but keep the pasta water to one side for adding to the sauce later.
  2. Next preheat the oven to 180°C (360°F). Lay the salmon fillets side by side in the centre of a piece of foil and sprinkle over the dried dill.
  3. Wrap the foil loosely around the fish leaving enough room for air to circulate around the fish whilst cooking. This will cook the fish more evenly. Place the foil package on a tray and bake in the oven for 15 minutes.
  4. Whilst the fish is cooking, start to prepare the sauce. On a medium heat gently fry the chopped garlic and shallots in 1 tablespoon of oil until soft.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Next, add 100ml of white wine to the shallots. Keep the pan on a medium heat and simmer for 30 seconds to allow the wine to reduce a little.
  6. Remove the pan from the heat and stir in the creme fraiche.
  7. Season the creamy sauce with salt, pepper and lemon juice. At this point check the consistency of the sauce, if you would like it thicker you can add a bit of flour (see further details in the ingredients notes above under 'flour').
  8. Return the pan to a low heat and add the raw prawns. Do not allow the sauce to boil at any point. Gently cook for a minute or so until the prawns start to turn bright pink. Remove the pan from the heat again until the salmon and pasta are ready to be added.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this recipe for steps 5-8.
  9. When the salmon is cooked, remove from the oven. Gently flake the salmon with a fork and add to the sauce in the pan. Mix in gently. (Any skin on the salmon should have stuck to the foil during cooking and can now be discarded.)
  10. Next, add the cooked linguine to the pan. 
  11. Add one or two ladles of the pasta cooking water and use tongues to mix the pasta into the sauce. Add more pasta water to further loosen the sauce if necessary.
  12. Finally, return the pan to the stove for a final blast of heat (do not boil), then stir through freshly chopped dill and chilli flakes before serving. Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this recipe for steps 9-12.

💭 Expert tips

  • Once the linguine has been removed from its cooking pan, set the pasta water to one side until the dish is nearly cooked. At this point check the sauce and add more of the starchy pasta water if necessary. This water will mix with the creme fraiche to create a lovely light sauce which clings to the pasta. The water can be added at any point to help loosen up the sauce and stop it from drying up.
  • For ease, I use tongues to take the linguine straight out of its cooking water and into the pan. This is quicker and cleaner than draining and also means some of the starchy, cooking water also gets transferred at the same time.
  • To make your salmon and prawn linguine a little more exciting why not try it with homemade pasta. Making your own pasta is super easy and all you need is eggs and flour.
  • Prawns are so easy to cook but can very quickly become overcooked. In this recipe the best way to achieve perfectly cooked king prawns is to add them raw to the warm sauce and heat gently for a minute or so. As you add the remaining ingredients and give the dish a final blast of heat the warmth from the sauce will gently cook the prawns to perfection. You known the prawns are done when they start to curl together and become bright pink.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What If theres skin on the fish?

Leave this on during cooking as it will add to the flavour and is easier to remove once the fish is cooked. Once the fish is cooked I tend to find that the skin sticks to the foil so I can flake the fish and tip it out with all its juices and leave the skin behind.

Can this dish be prepared in advance?

This dish is best cooked fresh so that there is no need to reheat any fish. Also the prawns only need a couple of minutes in the pan and will become dry if its cooked for longer or reheated. 

Can you freeze this recipe?

I wouldn’t recommend freezing this dish as its not advisable to cook, freeze and then reheat prawns. Also pasta tends to not freeze well.

A large shallow pan, viewed from above, filled with salmon and prawn linguine in a creamy sauce and finished with fresh dill and chilli flakes.

🍝 Other pasta recipes

🦐 Other fish recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A bowl of linguine in a creamy sauce with salmon and prawns.
Print

Salmon and Prawn Linguine Recipe

Impress friends and family by serving up this full flavoured salmon and prawn linguine recipe for dinner. Made with a lemon and cream sauce and topped with fresh dill and chilli flakes, every mouthful of this creamy salmon pasta recipe is a slurp-ful delight! Its a fantastic way to fit in a portion of oily fish and to get dinner on the table in less than 30 minutes.
Course Main Course, starter or main
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 725kcal

Ingredients

  • 150 g dried linguine
  • 2 boneless salmon fillets
  • 1 teaspoon dried dill
  • 1 tablespoon oil
  • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped or minced
  • 2 banana shallots finely chopped
  • 100 ml white wine
  • 150 ml creme fraiche
  • 150 g raw king prawns
  • Half lemon juiced
  • Few sprigs of fresh dill optional
  • Sprinkle of chilli flakes optional
  • Lemon wedges to serve

Instructions

  • Start by cooking the linguine according to the instructions on the packet. Once cooked, drain and cool but keep the pasta water to one side for adding to the sauce later.
  • Next preheat the oven to 180°C (360°F). Lay the salmon fillets side by side in the centre of a piece of foil and sprinkle over the dried dill.
  • Wrap the foil loosely around the fish leaving enough room for air to circulate around the fish whilst cooking. This will cook the fish more evenly. Place the foil package on a tray and bake in the oven for 15 minutes.
  • Whilst the fish is cooking, start to prepare the sauce. On a medium heat gently fry the chopped garlic and shallots in 1 tablespoon of oil until soft.
  • Next, add 100ml of white wine to the shallots. Keep the pan on a medium heat and simmer for 30 seconds to allow the wine to reduce a little.
  • Remove the pan from the heat and stir in the creme fraiche.
  • Season the creamy sauce with salt, pepper and lemon juice. At this point check the consistency of the sauce, if you would like it thicker you can add a bit of flour (see further details in the notes below under 'flour').
  • Return the pan to a low heat and add the raw prawns. Do not allow the sauce to boil at any point. Gently cook for a minute or so until the prawns start to turn bright pink. Remove the pan from the heat again until the salmon and pasta are ready to be added.
  • When the salmon is cooked, remove from the oven. Gently flake the salmon with a fork and add to the sauce in the pan. Mix in gently. (Any skin on the salmon should have stuck to the foil during cooking and can now be discarded.)
  • Next, add the cooked linguine to the pan.
  • Add one or two ladles of the pasta cooking water and use tongues to mix the pasta into the sauce. Add more pasta water to further loosen the sauce if necessary.
  • Finally, return the pan to the stove for a final blast of heat (do not boil), then stir through freshly chopped dill and chilli flakes before serving.

Notes

Fish: If you prefer you can choose something different to salmon. Try with trout, sea bass, tuna or cod. Or alternatively leave out the salmon completely and double up the prawns to make this a prawn linguine.
Prawns: This recipe uses the larger king prawns and cooks them from raw. Alternatively, substitute for cooked king prawns and add these in right at the end of the recipe before serving
White wine: White wine adds to the flavour of the sauce, however, you can leave this out if you prefer.
Pasta: This recipe uses linguine pasta, but it would also work really well with spaghetti, papardelle or tagliatelle.
Creme Fraiche: I prefer to use creme fraiche rather than cream as it is lighter and its slight sour flavour helps to cut through the richness of the sauce. Creme fraiche is also less like to curdle and so produces a silky smooth sauce.
Flour: This is not in the ingredients list, but its an option to use if you would like to thicken the sauce. After the creme fraiche is added, check the consistency of the sauce, if you would like it thicker then add in 1 tablespoon flour. Mix the flour with a bit of cold water to create a paste and then pour in to the pan. Heat gently and stir continuously until the sauce thickens.
Expert tips:
  • Once the linguine has been removed from its cooking pan, set the pasta water to one side until the dish is nearly cooked. At this point check the sauce and add more of the starchy pasta water if necessary. This water will mix with the creme fraiche to create a lovely light sauce which clings to the pasta. The water can be added at any point to help loosen up the sauce and stop it from drying up.
  • For ease, I use tongues to take the linguine straight out of its cooking water and into the pan. This is quicker and cleaner than draining and also means some of the starchy, cooking water also gets transferred at the same time.
  • To make your salmon and prawn linguine a little more exciting why not try it with homemade pasta. Making your own pasta is super easy and all you need is eggs and flour.
  • Prawns are so easy to cook but can very quickly become overcooked. In this recipe the best way to achieve perfectly cooked king prawns is to add them raw to the warm sauce and heat gently for a minute or so. As you add the remaining ingredients and give the dish a final blast of heat the warmth from the sauce will gently cook the prawns to perfection. You known the prawns are done when they start to curl together and become bright pink.

Nutrition

Serving: 1bowl | Calories: 725kcal | Carbohydrates: 63g | Protein: 60g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 283mg | Sodium: 672mg | Potassium: 1250mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 485IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 184mg | Iron: 5mg

The post Salmon and Prawn Linguine appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/salmon-prawn-linguine-spiralized-courgette/feed/ 0
Classic Fish Pie Recipe https://properfoodie.com/fish-pie-cheese-sauce-mash-topping/ https://properfoodie.com/fish-pie-cheese-sauce-mash-topping/#comments Mon, 01 Feb 2021 22:44:08 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=6085 A warm and comforting classic fish pie recipe. Made with chunks of salmon, cod and smoked haddock cooked in a creamy sauce with crisp mash topping. A really easy pie recipe that can be rustled up in just over an hour. Great for any night of the week. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe When...

Read More

The post Classic Fish Pie Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A warm and comforting classic fish pie recipe. Made with chunks of salmon, cod and smoked haddock cooked in a creamy sauce with crisp mash topping. A really easy pie recipe that can be rustled up in just over an hour. Great for any night of the week.

Large shallow casserole dish containing mash topped classic fish pie, baked until crisp and golden brown.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

When its cold out, this classic fish pie recipe will warm you through and leave you ready to face the elements the next day. Its also a pretty good dish for a cosy Saturday night in. Lock out the cold and get this pie in the oven!! Simple, easy and delightful. The classic dishes are always the best.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this classic fish pie recipe at home you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make this classic fish pie recipe with text overlay stating each ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Diced fish: For this recipe I used a mixture of salmon, cod and smoked haddock. However, feel free to choose your preferred fish. Or even swap some of the fish for prawns. You may also find that your local fish monger or supermarket offers a ready diced fish pie selection. This may work out cheaper than buying separated pieces of fish.

Milk: Semi skimmed milk (2%) is used in this recipe but for a richer flavour you can use whole milk. I don't recommend using skimmed milk which lacks the fat required for a smooth and silky sauce.

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour as the thickening agent for the sauce.

Cheese: The cheddar cheese is melted into the sauce before mixing in the fish. If preferred you can leave out the cheese and just use a white sauce. Alternatively, swap cheddar for a different cheese to create your preferred flavour.

Baby spinach: This is optional and can be left out if preferred or swapped for another green veg such as garden peas, asparagus or tenderstem broccoli.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Peel the potatoes and roughly chop into cubes. Add to a large pan, cover with water and cook on medium heat for around 40 minutes or until soft. Preheat the oven to 180°C.
  2. Meanwhile, take a medium pan and cook the onions and garlic in butter until soft.
  3. Add the flour and stir in, the mixture should clump slightly and turn to a paste.
  4. On low-medium heat, add around ⅕ of the milk to the onions and flour, stirring continuously until the mixture starts to thicken. See tip below.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this pie step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. As the mixture thickens add another helping of milk. Heat and stir until it thickens again and then continue until all the milk has been added.
  6. Next take the sauce off the heat and stir in the cheese.
  7. Add the chopped, raw fish to the cheese sauce and mix in carefully.
  8. Add the spinach leaves and stir in.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this pie recipe step by step for instructions 5-8.
  9. Transfer the fish pie mix to an ovenproof dish
  10. Drain the cooked potatoes, add the milk and butter and mash. Spoon the mash potato over the top of the fish pie mix then use the back of a spoon to spread evenly to the edges of the dish.
  11. Use a fork to mark and ruffle up the surface of the mash potato.
  12. Place in the centre of a preheated oven and bake for 30 minutes. Serve with a scattering of freshly chopped parsley leaves.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this pie recipe step by step for instructions 9-12.

💭 Expert tips

Sauce: When making the fish pie sauce try to keep the heat on medium-low. Heating too quickly can curdle the mixture. If the mixture does start to curdle remove from the heat momentarily and stir rapidly.

Recipe suggestion: If you're after an extra indulgent twist, dot the mash with extra butter and grate over extra cheese before baking in the oven.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can you make this recipe ahead of time?

Make this recipe up to just before the pie goes into the oven. At this point the pie can be covered and stored in the fridge or freezer until you are ready to cook it. Note: If you intend to freeze the uncooked pie make sure the fish is as fresh as possible and suitable for freezing.

When you are ready to cook, remove from the fridge and leave on the side for a hour or so to bring to room temperature. Or defrost overnight. Then cook in the oven as per the recipe instructions.

What if my fish has skin on?

If you choose to buy whole fillets of fish for this recipe then you may find that your fillets have skin on. Skinning a fish is quite easy if you use the right method and knife. The best knife to use is a sharp, flexible fish knife.

Place the fish on a board skin side down. To remove the skin use the knife with the blade facing away from you. slightly peel back the skin from one corner, then place the blade between the fish and its skin and hold onto the skin with your other hand. Keep the skin and the side of the blade flat to the board and work along the fillet with the knife. Press the side off the blade downwards into the board as well as moving it across.2 images showing how to remove the skin from a fillet of salmon

What to serve with fish pie?

Green vegetables, like green bean almondine, broccoli or peas make the perfect accompaniment to this creamy fish pie. However, if you were to make this fish pie with a pastry topping you could add a side of mash potato, Foil Pack Potatoes or even honey glazed carrots and parsnips.

For a dessert how about homemade Bakewell tart or for something lighter a loaf of freshly baked banana bread.

Can you reheat this recipe once cooked?

Although the fish pie will never be as good as the day you make it fresh, you can safely store and reheat it. Note that this is assumed that the fish you use is as fresh as possible. Make sure your fish pie is fully cooled before covering and storing in the fridge for up to 3 days. To to reheat place in an oven proof dish, cover with foil and warm in the oven for 25 minutes. Remove the foil for the last 5 minutes and check its piping hot throughout. Alternatively, transfer to a microwavable container and microwave on high for 4-5 minutes until piping hot throughout,

Can you freeze leftover fish pie?

Make sure the fish pie is fully cooled then transfer to a sealed container and freeze for up to 3 months. To reheat simply remove the fish pie from the freezer and completely defrost before cooking in the oven for 30 minutes at 180 degrees C.  You should cover the pie with foil to prevent the top from crisping up too much as you are cooking it a second time.  Remove the foil for the last 5 minutes to finish, check the pie is hot throughout and enjoy.

Oblong baking dish containing classic fish pie recipe with a mash potato topping that has been marked with a fork and baked until crisp.

🦐 Other fish recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Large shallow casserole dish containing mash topped classic fish pie, baked until crisp and golden brown.
Print

Classic Fish Pie Recipe

A warm and comforting classic fish pie recipe. Made with chunks of salmon, cod and smoked haddock in a creamy sauce with crisp mash topping. A really easy pie recipe that can be rustled up in just over an hour. Great for any night of the week.
Course Dinner
Cuisine British
Prep Time 45 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 562kcal

Equipment

  • Flexible fish knife for skinning fish (if necessary)
  • Large pan for potatoes
  • Medium pan for filling
  • Masher
  • Large ovenproof dish

Ingredients

For the mash topping

  • 1 kg potatoes
  • 20 g butter
  • Splash of milk

For the filling

  • 20 g butter
  • 1 onion finely chopped
  • 1 garlic clove finely chopped
  • 30 g plain flour
  • 400 ml semi skimmed milk
  • 50 g cheddar cheese
  • 280 g cod cut into bite size chunks
  • 140 g smoked haddock cut into bite size chunks
  • 140 g salmon cut into bite size chunks
  • 50 g baby spinach leaves

Instructions

  • Peel the potatoes and roughly chop into cubes. Add to a large pan, cover with water and cook on medium heat for around 40 minutes or until soft. Preheat the oven to 180°C.
  • Meanwhile, take a medium pan and cook the onions and garlic in butter until soft.
  • Add the flour and stir in, the mixture should clump slightly and turn to a paste.
  • On low-medium heat, add around ⅕ of the milk to the onions and flour, stirring continuously until the mixture starts to thicken. See tip below.
  • As the mixture thickens add another helping of milk. Heat and stir until it thickens again and then continue until all the milk has been added.
  • Next take the sauce off the heat and stir in the cheese.
  • Add the chopped, raw fish to the cheese sauce and mix in carefully.
  • Add the spinach leaves and stir in.
  • Transfer the fish pie mix to an ovenproof dish
  • Drain the cooked potatoes, add the milk and butter and mash. Spoon the mash potato over the top of the fish pie mix then use the back of a spoon to spread evenly to the edges of the dish.
  • Use a fork to mark and ruffle up the surface of the mash potato.
  • Place in the centre of a preheated oven and bake for 30 minutes. Serve with a scattering of freshly chopped parsley leaves.

Notes

Sauce tip: When making the fish pie sauce try to keep the heat on medium-low. Heating too quickly can curdle the mixture. If the mixture does start to curdle remove from the heat momentarily and stir rapidly.
Recipe suggestion: If you're after an extra indulgent twist, dot the mash with extra butter and grate over extra cheese before baking in the oven.
Can you make this recipe ahead of time? Make this recipe up to just before the pie goes into the oven. At this point the pie can be covered and stored in the fridge or freezer until you are ready to cook it. Note: If you intend to freeze the uncooked pie make sure the fish is as fresh as possible and suitable for freezing. When you are ready to cook, remove from the fridge and leave on the side for a hour or so to bring to room temperature. Or defrost overnight. Then cook in the oven as per the recipe instructions.
What if my fish has skin on? If you choose to buy whole fillets of fish for this recipe then you may find that your fillets have skin on. Skinning a fish is quite easy if you use the right method and knife. The best knife to use is a sharp, flexible fish knife. Place the fish on a board skin side down. To remove the skin use the knife with the blade facing away from you. slightly peel back the skin from one corner, then place the blade between the fish and its skin and hold onto the skin with your other hand. Keep the skin and the side of the blade flat to the board and work along the fillet with the knife. Press the side off the blade downwards into the board as well as moving it across.2 images showing how to remove the skin from a fillet of salmon
Can you freeze leftover fish pie? Make sure the fish pie is fully cooled then transfer to a sealed container and freeze for up to 3 months. To reheat simply remove the fish pie from the freezer and completely defrost before cooking in the oven for 30 minutes at 180 degrees C.  You should cover the pie with foil to prevent the top from crisping up too much as you are cooking it a second time.  Remove the foil for the last 5 minutes to finish, check the pie is hot throughout and enjoy. 


Nutrition

Serving: 0.25pie | Calories: 562kcal | Carbohydrates: 59g | Protein: 42g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 119mg | Sodium: 545mg | Potassium: 1955mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 1733IU | Vitamin C: 57mg | Calcium: 304mg | Iron: 4mg

The post Classic Fish Pie Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/fish-pie-cheese-sauce-mash-topping/feed/ 7
Scotch Pancakes Recipe (Drop Scones) https://properfoodie.com/scotch-pancakes-recipe/ https://properfoodie.com/scotch-pancakes-recipe/#respond Sat, 30 Jan 2021 19:49:06 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=16955 Fluffy and light scotch pancakes recipe made with self raising flour, sugar, milk and 1 egg. These soft and delightful scotch pancakes (or drop scones) are a perfect sweet treat for breakfast or afternoon tea. Make the batter for this easy recipe in just 5 minutes and enjoy hot, buttery scotch pancakes every day of...

Read More

The post Scotch Pancakes Recipe (Drop Scones) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Fluffy and light scotch pancakes recipe made with self raising flour, sugar, milk and 1 egg. These soft and delightful scotch pancakes (or drop scones) are a perfect sweet treat for breakfast or afternoon tea. Make the batter for this easy recipe in just 5 minutes and enjoy hot, buttery scotch pancakes every day of the week. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes.

A tall stack of scotch pancakes on a plate with melted butter on top and honey being drizzled over with a wooden honey dipper.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

These soft and sweet scotch pancakes are perfect for breakfast, hot and dripping with butter. Make up a batch at the start of the week and then pop a couple in the toaster to warm for your breakfast each day. This recipe is really easy and requires just 5 minutes to whisk together the batter.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this Scotch pancakes recipe at home you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make Scotch pancakes recipe with text overlay stating each ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Milk: Semi skimmed milk (2%) is used in this recipe but for a richer flavour you can use whole milk. I don't recommend using skimmed milk which lacks the fat required to keep the pancakes soft and full of flavour.

Flour: This recipe uses UK self raising flour, which is different to the USA version. If you don't have this type of flour, it can be substituted for: 250g (2 cups) of all purpose flour + 1 level teaspoon of baking powder. For more info see this article on how to make self raising flour.

Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan, then wiping with a kitchen towel, so spreading the butter and removing any excess.

Caster Sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the recipe to make the pancakes sweet. Caster sugar is the best option as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the scotch pancakes. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by sifting flour and sugar into a large mixing bowl.
  2. Make a well in the flour mix and crack in 1 large egg.
  3. Add half of the milk then start to whisk the milk and egg into the flour.
  4. Slowly start to add more of the milk to the batter, whisking well between each addition. The gradual addition will ensure a lump free batter.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Add enough milk until the batter is the consistency of thick pouring cream.
  6. Place a frying pan on a medium heat. Add a bit of butter and melt. Spread the butter around the pan using kitchen towel and remove any excess. Give your batter a good mix and then scoop ½ of a ladleful of pancake mix into the pan.
  7. Cook for a minute or so, until bubbles start forming on top of the batter.
  8. Flip the pancake and cook for a further minute on the second side.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 5-8.
  9. Repeat steps 6-8 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil.

💭 Expert tips

  • For extra flavour and texture mix fruit, spices, chocolate chips or spread into the pancake batter.
  • Don't over mix the batter. Mix enough to just combine.
  • If your pancakes are browning too much or are sticking to the pan then you need to add more oil or butter and spread it evenly around the whole surface. I usually melt a bit of butter and then use kitchen towel to spread it around and remove any excess.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What is the difference between Scotch and American pancakes?

Scotch pancakes, also known as drop scones, are made with self raising flour which does a similar job to the baking powder in American pancakes. Therefore, scotch and American pancakes are very similar, the only real difference being that the scotch pancakes recipe includes caster sugar. So scotch pancakes are sweeter and primed for salty, melted butter.

What toppings to serve with pancakes?

The most simple topping for scotch pancakes is butter. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Honey can also be added, but this isn't strictly necessary as scotch pancakes are already sweet.

Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, banana, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

Can you reheat pancakes?

In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan. However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes. Alternatively, you can pop the pancakes in a toaster briefly or pop the pan back on the heat and warm each pancake on both sides for 10 seconds or so.

A tall stack of scotch pancakes on a plate with melted butter on top ad a small dish on honey in the background.

🥞 Other Pancake recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A tall stack of scotch pancakes on a plate with melted butter on top and honey being drizzled over with a wooden honey dipper.
Print

Scotch Pancakes Recipe (Drop Scones)

Fluffy and light scotch pancakes recipe made with self raising flour, sugar, milk and 1 egg. These soft and delightful scotch pancakes (or drop scones) are a perfect sweet treat for breakfast or afternoon tea. Make the batter for this easy recipe in just 5 minutes and enjoy hot, buttery scotch pancakes every day of the week.
Course afternoon tea, Breakfast, brunch
Cuisine British
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 12 pancakes
Calories 96kcal

Equipment

  • Sieve
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Whisk
  • Frying pan
  • Ladle
  • Spatula

Ingredients

  • 225 g self raising flour
  • 40 g caster sugar
  • 1 egg
  • 250 ml semi skimmed milk
  • Butter for cooking

Instructions

  • Start by sifting flour and sugar into a large mixing bowl.
  • Make a well in the flour mix and crack in 1 large egg.
  • Add half of the milk then start to whisk the milk and egg into the flour.
  • Slowly start to add more of the milk to the batter, whisking well between each addition. The gradual addition will ensure a lump free batter.
  • Add enough milk until the batter is the consistency of thick pouring cream.
  • Place a frying pan on a medium heat. Add a bit of butter and melt. Spread the butter around the pan using kitchen towel and remove any excess. Give your batter a good mix and then scoop ½ of a ladleful of pancake mix into the pan.
  • Cook for a minute or so, until bubbles start forming on top of the batter.
  • Flip the pancake and cook for a further minute on the second side.
  • Repeat steps 6-8 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil.

Notes

Milk: Semi skimmed milk (2%) is used in this recipe but for a richer flavour you can use whole milk. I don't recommend using skimmed milk which lacks the fat required to keep the pancakes soft and full of flavour.
Flour: This recipe uses UK self raising flour, which is different to the USA version. If you don't have this type of flour, it can be substituted for: 250g (2 cups) of all purpose flour + 1 level teaspoon of baking powder. For more info see this article on how to make self raising flour.
Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan, then wiping with a kitchen towel to spread the butter and remove any excess.
Caster Sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the recipe to make the pancakes sweet. Caster sugar is the best option as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the scotch pancakes. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.
Why are my pancakes browning too much? If your pancakes are browning too much or are sticking to the pan then you need to add more oil or butter and spread it evenly around the whole surface. I usually melt a bit of butter and then use kitchen towel to spread it around and remove any excess.
Can you reheat pancakes? In my opinion pancakes are best eaten straight from the pan. However, if you wish, you can make a full batch of pancakes and wrap in foil as you go to keep them warm. If they do need reheating, place the foil wrapped pancakes in a hot oven for 5 minutes. Alternatively, you can pop the pancakes in a toaster briefly or pop the pan back on the heat and warm each pancake on both sides for 10 seconds or so.
What toppings to serve with pancakes? The most simple topping for scotch pancakes is butter. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Honey can also be added, but this isn't strictly necessary as scotch pancakes are already sweet. Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, banana, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

Nutrition

Serving: 1pancake | Calories: 96kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 15mg | Potassium: 53mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 41IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 30mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Scotch Pancakes Recipe (Drop Scones) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/scotch-pancakes-recipe/feed/ 0
Hot Cross Buns Recipe https://properfoodie.com/hot-cross-buns-recipe/ https://properfoodie.com/hot-cross-buns-recipe/#comments Mon, 25 Jan 2021 16:08:13 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=16850 Warm and sticky hot cross buns fresh out of the oven. Make your own hot cross buns this Easter with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine! Soft and fluffy and filled with juicy sultanas and sweet spices, they are perfect...

Read More

The post Hot Cross Buns Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Warm and sticky hot cross buns fresh out of the oven. Make your own hot cross buns this Easter with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine! Soft and fluffy and filled with juicy sultanas and sweet spices, they are perfect for snacking on after a long walk on Easter Sunday.

Hot cross buns on a cooling rack with one sliced in half

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Making hot cross buns can be a fairly complex and daunting process. There are a number of steps involved but at the heart, its just a basic bread rolls recipe, and these rustic hot cross buns are actually really easy to make. With a foolproof method and 10 minute dough recipe these soft and fluffy buns will easily take centre stage this Easter.

You don't need a bread machine and theres no need to activate the yeast before adding it to the flour. This is a simple method of adding wet ingredients to dry and bringing it all together into the most perfect batch of homemade hot cross buns.

🍽 Equipment notes

Useful bits of equipment for making this hot cross buns recipe:

  • Large flat baking tray lined with greaseproof paper
  • Piping bag for piping on the crosses.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this hot cross buns recipe at home you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make hot cross buns with text overlay stating each ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Flour: Strong bread flour (or just bread flour if you are in the US) contains a higher amount of protein, which will allow for more air to be trapped when the dough rises and bakes. Therefore, producing a light, soft and fluffy hot cross bun.

Fast action or instant yeast: One sachet of this will ensure a good rise. Make sure you use a yeast that states it can be added straight to the recipe or flour. I find fast action yeast super easy to work with as it doesn't need to be activated first and it always works well when making any kind of bread.

Fresh yeast could also be used here but double the amount would be needed. Fresh yeast will need to be activated in the milk first rather than adding to the flour mixture. If you choose this option you will need to melt the butter and milk in a pan then allow to cool to a luke warm temperature. Then dissolve the fresh yeast in the warm milk and allow to sit for a couple of minutes before mixing into the flour. Read more about different types of yeast and how to use them here.

Sultanas: Any dried fruit will work well in this recipe. Try with currants, raisins, dried cranberries, dried apricot pieces, orange peel or chocolate chips.

Mixed spice: This is a mixture of several sweet spices, including cinnamon, nutmeg and ginger. If you can't get hold of any mixed spice then you can use a mix of the above single spices.

Caster sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the recipe to make the bread sweet. Although other types of sugar could be used here, I find caster sugar to be the best as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the bread. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place the milk and butter in a small pan and heat gently until the butter has melted. Set to one side to cool.
  2. Next, in large bowl mix together the flour, sugar, yeast, salt and mixed spice (dry ingredients).
  3. Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients. Whisk the 2 eggs and pour into the well along with a quarter of the heated milk mixture. Stir well.
  4. Gradually add the rest of the milk mixture stirring between each addition to bring together into a dough.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Turn out onto a clean floured work surface. Knead for 5 minutes until it starts to feel smooth and less sticky. 
  6. Place the dough in an oiled bowl and cover. Leave the bowl to stand in a warm place (e.g. - on top of a pre heated oven) for 1 hour or until doubled in size.
  7. Knock back the risen dough and turn out on a floured work surface. Flatten out the roughly with your fingertips.
  8. Grab the dough on either side with both hands and stretch out into a long strip. Add the sultanas to the centre of the strip of dough. A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 5-8.
  9. Roll up into a sausage shape from one side to the other. This should allow for the fruit to be fully combined.
  10. Next, halve and then quarter the dough. Then halve each quarter, creating 8 pieces that will be similar in size. Shape each piece into a round ball. Then place on a lined baking tray. Space out well to leave room for rising in the oven. Cover lightly with cling film and leave in a warm place to rise for 30 minutes. At this point you can preheat the oven to 160°C (320°F).
  11. Whilst waiting for the second rise, make the paste for the crosses by mixing together 100g plain flour with 8 tablespoon whole milk. Transfer to a piping bag ready to pipe the crosses onto the buns.
  12. After 30 minutes remove the cling film from the dough balls. Whisk 1 egg with 1 tablespoon of whole milk and use a pastry brush to glaze the dough balls all over. A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 9-12.
  13. Pipe crosses over the glazed buns then place in the centre of a pre heated oven and bake at 160°C (320°F) for 20-25 minutes or until golden brown.
  14. Remove the baked hot cross buns from the oven. Heat up some apricot jam and paint over the buns whilst still hot.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step for instructions 13-14.

💭 Expert tips

  • Time yourself when kneading and make sure you knead for the full 5 minutes.
  • Only allow the dough to rise until it has about doubled in size. In a warm kitchen this should take around an hour. If you leave it for longer the gas bubbles can become too big and the buns will then fail to rise when baked.
  • If your kitchen is quite cool the dough could take up to 2 hours to double in size. You can speed this up by standing on top of a pre heated oven. Alternatively place the dough in the fridge if you would prefer to leave it to prove over a few hours instead (e.g. overnight).
  • When making the paste for the crosses, add the milk a bit at a time in order to reach your desired consistency. A thicker paste will give a thiner and more defined cross. A thinner paste will create a wider and flatter cross.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How should hot cross buns be stored?

Once made, allow to fully cool then wrap in cling film and stored in an air tight container. The buns will keep well and stay soft for 2-3 days, after this you may find that they start to harden and go stale.

Can this recipe be made in advance?

Make the recipe as per the instructions up to when the dough is rolled into 8 balls. At this point cover with cling film and place in the fridge. The dough balls can now stay in the fridge overnight as the low temperature will mean a slow rise. In the morning remove from the fridge and leave on the side for an hour to warm up. Arrange on a tray, well spaced, then glaze with egg wash and pipe on the crosses before baking in the oven as per the recipe.

Can this recipe be reheated?

As these are HOT cross buns, it is nice to actually eat them whilst still warm. Once cooled you can reheat by wrapping the buns in foil, then place in a hot oven and warm gently for 5 minutes.

Can you freeze hot cross buns?

Once baked and fully cooled, place the buns in an airtight container or sealable freezer bag and freeze for up to 3 months.

When ready to eat, remove from the freezer and either heat each bun for 1-2 minutes in the microwave or leave on the side to fully defrost then wrap in foil and pop in a hot oven to warm for 5 minutes.

three homemade hot cross buns on a cooli rack with a small dish of sultanas in the background

Other Easter bakes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

hot cross buns on a cooling rack with one sliced in half
Print

Hot Cross Buns Recipe

Warm and sticky hot cross buns fresh out of the oven. Make your own hot cross buns this Easter with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine! Soft and fluffy and filled with juicy sultanas and sweet spices, they are perfect for snacking on after a long walk on Easter Sunday.
Course afternoon tea, Breakfast, brunch, Dessert, Snack
Cuisine British, Easter
Prep Time 2 hours 35 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 3 hours
Servings 8 Hot cross buns
Calories 483kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Small saucepan
  • Small mixing bowl or jug
  • Large flat baking tray lined with greaseproof paper
  • Pastry brush
  • Piping bag for piping on the crosses

Ingredients

For the buns

  • 200 ml whole milk
  • 100 g unsalted butter
  • 2 large eggs beaten
  • 500 g strong white bread flour
  • 50 g caster sugar
  • 7 g sachet of fast action yeast
  • Pinch salt
  • 2 teaspoon mixed spice
  • 150 g Sultanas

For the cross

  • 100 g plain flour
  • 8 tablespoon whole milk

For the egg wash

  • 1 egg beaten
  • ½ tbsp. whole milk

For the glaze

  • 150 g Apricot jam

Instructions

  • Place the milk and butter in a small pan and heat gently until the butter has melted. Set to one side to cool.
  • Next, in large bowl mix together the flour, sugar, yeast, salt and mixed spice (dry ingredients).
  • Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients. Whisk the 2 eggs and pour into the well along with a quarter of the heated milk mixture. Stir well.
  • Gradually add the rest of the milk mixture stirring between each addition to bring together into a dough.
  • Turn out onto a clean floured work surface. Knead for 5 minutes until it starts to feel smooth and less sticky.
  • Place the dough in an oiled bowl and cover. Leave the bowl to stand in a warm place (e.g. - on top of a pre heated oven) for 1 hour or until doubled in size.
  • Knock back the risen dough and turn out on a floured work surface. Flatten out roughly with your fingertips.
  • Grab the dough on either side with both hands and stretch out into a long strip. Add the sultanas to the centre of the strip of dough.
  • Roll up into a sausage shape from one side to the other. This should allow for the fruit to be fully combined.
  • Next, halve and then quarter the dough. Then halve each quarter, creating 8 pieces that will be similar in size. Shape each piece into a round ball. Then place on a lined baking tray. Space out well to leave room for rising in the oven. Cover lightly with cling film and leave in a warm place to rise for 30 minutes. At this point you can preheat the oven to 160°C (320°F).
  • Whilst waiting for the second rise, make the paste for the crosses by mixing together 100g plain flour with 8 tablespoon whole milk. Transfer to a piping bag ready to pipe the crosses onto the buns.
  • After 30 minutes remove the cling film from the dough balls. Whisk 1 egg with 1 tablespoon of whole milk and use a pastry brush to glaze the dough balls all over.
  • Pipe crosses over the glazed dough balls then place in the centre of a pre heated oven and bake at 160°C (320°F) for 20-25 minutes or until golden brown.
  • Remove the baked hot cross buns from the oven. Heat up some apricot jam and paint over the buns whilst still hot.

Notes

Fast action or instant yeast: One sachet of this will ensure a good rise. Make sure you use a yeast that states it can be added straight to the recipe or flour. I find fast action yeast super easy to work with as it doesn't need to be activated first and it always works well when making any kind of bread.
Fresh yeast could also be used here but double the amount would be needed. Fresh yeast will need to be activated in the milk first rather than adding to the flour mixture. If you choose this option you will need to melt the butter and milk in a pan then allow to cool to a luke warm temperature. Then dissolve the fresh yeast in the warm milk and allow to sit for a couple of minutes before mixing into the flour. Read more about different types of yeast and how to use them here.
Sultanas: Any dried fruit will work well in this recipe. Try with currants, raisins, dried cranberries, dried apricot pieces, orange peel or chocolate chips.
Mixed spice: This is a mixture of several sweet spices, including cinnamon, nutmeg and ginger. If you can't get hold of any mixed spice then you can use a mix of the above single spices.
Caster sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the dough to make the bread sweet. Although other types of sugar could be used here, I find caster sugar to be the best as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the bread. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.
How should hot cross buns be stored? Once made, allow to fully cool then wrap in cling film and stored in an air tight container. The buns will keep well and stay soft for 2-3 days, after this you may find that they start to harden and go stale.
Can this recipe be made in advance? Make the recipe as per the instructions up to when the dough is rolled into 8 balls. At this point cover with cling film and place in the fridge. The dough balls can now stay in the fridge overnight as the low temperature will mean a slow rise. In the morning remove from the fridge and leave on the side for an hour to warm up. Arrange on a tray, well spaced, then glaze with egg wash and pipe on the crosses before baking in the oven as per the recipe.
Can this recipe be reheated? As these are HOT cross buns, it is nice to actually eat them whilst still warm. Once cooled you can reheat by wrapping the buns in foil, then place in a hot oven and warm gently for 5 minutes.
Can you freeze hot cross buns? Once baked and fully cooled, place the buns in an airtight container or sealable freezer bag and freeze for up to 3 months. When ready to eat, remove from the freezer and either heat each bun for 1-2 minutes in the microwave or leave on the side to fully defrost then wrap in foil and pop in a hot oven to warm for 5 minutes.
Expert tips:
  • Time yourself when kneading and make sure you knead for the full 5 minutes.
  • Only allow the dough to rise until it has about doubled in size. In a warm kitchen this should take around an hour. If you leave it for longer the gas bubbles can become too big and the dough will then fail to rise when baked. If your kitchen is quite cool the dough could take up to 2 hours to double in size. You can speed this up by standing on top of a pre heated oven. Alternatively place the dough in the fridge if you would prefer to leave it to prove over a few hours instead (e.g. overnight).
  • When making the paste for the crosses, add the milk a bit at a time in order to reach your desired consistency. A thicker paste will give a thiner and more defined cross. A thinner paste will create a wider and flatter cross.

Nutrition

Calories: 483kcal | Carbohydrates: 76g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 92mg | Sodium: 52mg | Potassium: 182mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 508IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 77mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Hot Cross Buns Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/hot-cross-buns-recipe/feed/ 4
Mini Hot Cross Buns (with Chocolate) https://properfoodie.com/mini-hot-cross-bun-tear-and-share/ https://properfoodie.com/mini-hot-cross-bun-tear-and-share/#comments Sat, 24 Mar 2018 21:56:11 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=6405 Sweet and sticky mini hot cross buns served with chocolate sauce dip! Soft and fluffy and filled with chocolate chunks, sweet spices and dried mixed fruit. The recipe for these delightful chocolate chip hot cross buns is super easy and it takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook...

Read More

The post Mini Hot Cross Buns (with Chocolate) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Sweet and sticky mini hot cross buns served with chocolate sauce dip! Soft and fluffy and filled with chocolate chunks, sweet spices and dried mixed fruit. The recipe for these delightful chocolate chip hot cross buns is super easy and it takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine!

Small hot cross buns arranged in a tear and share style ring with melted chocolate dip at the side.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

From afar, making hot cross buns can seem like a complex process. There is a fair number of steps involved in any hot cross bun recipe, but its basically just like making bread with a few extra fancy bits.

Baked to perfection in a tear and share style ring and served with an easy melted chocolate sauce, this recipe is a great way to enjoy a sticky bun or two this Easter!

🥘 Ingredients

To make these chocolate hot cross buns you will need ingredients for a standard hot cross bun recipe:

Plus some extra ingredients to make these mini hot cross buns extra special:

  • Chocolate chips or chunks
  • Ground ginger
  • Ground nutmeg
  • dried mixed peel
  • Milk and white baking chocolate for making a chocolate sauce dip.

Ingredient notes

Flour: Strong bread flour (or just bread flour if you are in the US) contains a higher amount of protein, which will allow for more air to be trapped when the dough rises and bakes. Therefore, producing a light, soft and fluffy hot cross bun.

Fast action or instant yeast: One sachet of this will ensure a good rise. Make sure you use a yeast that states it can be added straight to the recipe or flour. I find fast action yeast super easy to work with as it doesn't need to be activated first and it always works well when making any kind of bread.

Fresh yeast could also be used here but double the amount would be needed. Fresh yeast will need to be activated in the milk first rather than adding to the flour mixture. If you choose this option you will need to melt the butter and milk in a pan then allow to cool to a luke warm temperature. Then dissolve the fresh yeast in the warm milk and allow to sit for a couple of minutes before mixing into the flour. Read more about different types of yeast and how to use them here.

Caster sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the dough to make the bread sweet. Although other types of sugar could be used here, I find caster sugar to be the best as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the bread. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place the milk and butter in a small pan and heat gently until the butter has melted. Set to one side to cool.
  2. In a small jug whisk together the 2 large eggs and set to one side.
  3. Next, in large bowl mix together the flour, sugar, yeast, salt, mixed spice, nutmeg and ginger (dry ingredients).
  4. Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients. Pour in the eggs and a quarter of the milk mixture. Stir well. Gradually add the rest of the milk stirring between each addition to bring together into a dough.
  5. Turn the dough out onto a clean floured work surface. Knead for 5 minutes until it starts to feel smooth and less sticky. Place the dough in an oiled bowl and cover. Leave the bowl to stand in a warm place (e.g. - on top of a pre heated oven) for 1 hour or until doubled in size.
  6. Knock back the risen dough and turn out on a floured work surface. Flatten out the dough roughly with your fingertips. Grab the dough on either side with both hands and stretch out into a long strip. Add the currants, peel and chocolate to the centre of the strip of dough. Roll up the dough into a sausage shape from one side to the other. This should allow for the fruit and chocolate to be fully combined into the dough.
  7. Divide the dough into small balls. This recipes makes approx. 32 small buns.
    A collage of 4 images showing how to make this recipe step by step.
  8. Lay out the dough balls into your tear and share design on a large baking tray. If you would like to serve with a small dipping dish in the middle place this into the centre now to measure a large enough gap. Also leave a small gap in-between each ball to leave room for further rising. Cover with cling film or a clean tea towel and leave for another hour to rise.
  9. Meanwhile mix together 100g flour with 8 tablespoon of milk to form a smooth paste. Transfer to a piping bag ready to pipe on the crosses.
  10. Pre heat the oven to 160 degrees C. Glaze the risen dough balls with egg wash (1 egg whisked with a splash of whole milk). Then pipe on the crosses.
  11. Place the buns in the oven for 20-25 minutes or until golden brown.collage of 2 images showing how to arrange the dough balls and how to pipe on the crosses before baking
  12. Five minutes before the buns come out of the oven, melt the apricot jam in a small pan. As soon as the buns are removed from the oven paint over the heated jam and then leave to cool.
  13. Once the hot cross bun tear and share is fully cooled, place the chocolate in a microwaveable bowl and heat in 30 second bursts until melted. Mix the melted white and milk chocolate and serve with the tear and share.

💭 Expert tips

  • Gently heat the milk and melt in the butter the leave to cool to body temperature before adding to the dry ingredients.
  • For ease and to save time, add the fast action yeast to the dry ingredients. It will activate when the wet ingredients are mixed in. 
  • Divide the dough evenly by halving each piece until you have enough even pieces to make the 32 small balls.
  • Position the dough balls into a tear and share shape leaving enough space for a second rise and for a dipping bowl in the middle

❓ Frequently asked questions

How should mini hot cross buns be stored?

Once made, allow to fully cool then wrap in cling film and stored in an air tight container. The buns will keep well and stay soft for 2-3 days, after this you may find that the rolls start to harden and go stale.

Can this recipe be made in advance?

Make the recipe as per the instructions up to when the bun dough is rolled into 32 balls. At this point cover with cling film and place in the fridge. The dough balls can now stay in the fridge overnight as the low temperature will mean a slow rise. In the morning remove from the fridge and leave on the side for an hour to warm up. Arrange on a tray then glaze with egg wash and pipe on the crosses before baking in the oven as per the recipe.

Can this recipe be reheated?

As these are HOT cross buns, it is nice to actually eat them whilst still warm. Once cooled you can reheat by wrapping the rolls in foil then place in a hot oven and warm gently for 5 minutes.

Can you freeze mini hot cross buns?

Once baked and fully cooled, place the buns in an airtight container or sealable freezer bag and freeze for up to 3 months. Its easier to freeze the buns loose rather than in the tear and share shape.

When ready to eat remove from the freezer and either heat each bun for 1-2 minutes in the microwave or leave on the side to fully defrost then wrap in foil and pop in the oven to warm for 5 minutes.

mini hot cross buns bakes in a ring shape with melted chocolate dip.

🍰 Other Easter bakes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Small hot cross buns arranged in a tear and share style ring with melted chocolate dip at the side.
Print

Mini Hot Cross Buns (With Chocolate)

Sweet and sticky mini hot cross buns! Soft and fluffy and filled with chocolate chunks, sweet spices and dried mixed fruit. The recipe for these delightful chocolate chip hot cross buns is super easy and it takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine!
Course Dessert, party food, pudding
Cuisine British
Prep Time 3 hours 25 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 3 hours 45 minutes
Servings 32 mini buns
Calories 155kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Baking tray
  • Piping bag for the crosses
  • Pastry brush for the egg wash and glaze
  • Small pan for the apricot glaze

Ingredients

For the buns

  • 200 ml whole milk
  • 75 g unsalted butter
  • 2 large eggs beaten
  • 450 g strong white bread flour
  • 80 g caster sugar
  • 7 g sachet of fast action yeast
  • Pinch salt
  • 1 teaspoon mixed spice
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • ½ teaspoon ground ginger
  • 50 g dried mixed peel
  • 50 g currants
  • 70 g chocolate chunks/chips

For the cross

  • 100 g plain flour
  • 8 tablespoon whole milk

For the egg wash

  • 1 egg beaten
  • ½ tablespoon whole milk

For the glaze

  • 150 g apricot jam

For the chocolate dip

  • 100 g milk chocolate
  • 100 g white chocolate

Instructions

To make the buns

  • Place the milk and butter in a small pan and heat gently until the butter has melted. Set to one side to cool.
  • In a small jug whisk together the 2 large eggs and set to one side.
  • Next, in large bowl mix together the flour, sugar, yeast, salt, mixed spice, nutmeg and ginger (dry ingredients).
  • Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients. Pour in the eggs and a quarter of the milk mixture. Stir well. Gradually add the rest of the milk stirring between each addition to bring together into a dough.
  • Turn the dough out onto a clean floured work surface. Knead for 5 minutes until it starts to feel smooth and less sticky. Place the dough in an oiled bowl and cover. Leave the bowl to stand in a warm place (e.g. - on top of a pre heated oven) for 1 hour or until doubled in size.
  • After the dough has risen, uncover and turn out on a floured work surface. Flatten out the dough roughly with your fingertips. Grab the dough on either side with both hands and stretch out into a long strip. Add the currants, peel and chocolate to the centre of the strip of dough. Fold all the sides in and then roll up the dough into a sausage shape from one side to the other. This should allow for the fruit and chocolate to be fully combined into the dough.
  • The dough can now be divided up into small dough balls. There is enough dough to make 32 small buns. I divided mine into 26 small buns for the tear and share and then made 4 separate larger buns.
  • Lay out the dough balls into your tear and share design on a large baking tray. If you would like to serve with a small dipping dish in the middle place this into the centre now to measure a large enough gap. Also leave a small gap in-between each ball to leave room for further rising. Cover with cling film or a clean tea towel and leave for another hour to rise.

To make the cross

  • Meanwhile mix together 100g flour with 8 tablespoon of milk to form a smooth paste. Transfer to a piping bag ready to pipe on the crosses.

Bake

  • Pre heat the oven to 160 degrees C. After an hour, remove the tea towel from the dough balls. Mix together the egg and ½ tablespoon milk to make the egg wash. Use a pastry brush to glaze the dough balls with the egg wash.
  • Next pipe the crosses onto the buns, try to pipe in one line over multiple buns where possible, just to make it easier. With my circular design I piped around in one circle and then across in a star shape.
  • Place the buns in the oven for 20-25 minutes or until golden brown.

To make the sticky apricot glaze.

  • 5 minutes before the buns come out of the oven, melt the apricot jam in a small pan. As soon as the buns are removed from the oven paint over the heated apricot jam and then leave to cool.

To make the chocolate dip

  • Once the hot cross bun tear and share is fully cooled, place the chocolate in a microwaveable bowl and heat in 30 second bursts until melted. Mix the melted white and milk chocolate and serve with the tear and share.

Notes

Flour: Strong bread flour (or just bread flour if you are in the US) contains a higher amount of protein, which will allow for more air to be trapped when the dough rises and bakes. Therefore, producing a light, soft and fluffy hot cross bun.
Fast action or instant yeast: One sachet of this will ensure a good rise. Make sure you use a yeast that states it can be added straight to the recipe or flour. I find fast action yeast super easy to work with as it doesn't need to be activated first and it always works well when making any kind of bread.
Fresh yeast could also be used here but double the amount would be needed. Fresh yeast will need to be activated in the milk first rather than adding to the flour mixture. If you choose this option you will need to melt the butter and milk in a pan then allow to cool to a luke warm temperature. Then dissolve the fresh yeast in the warm milk and allow to sit for a couple of minutes before mixing into the flour. Read more about different types of yeast and how to use them here.
Caster sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the dough to make the bread sweet. Although other types of sugar could be used here, I find caster sugar to be the best as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the bread. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.
How should mini hot cross buns be stored? Once made, allow to fully cool then wrap in cling film and stored in an air tight container. The buns will keep well and stay soft for 2-3 days, after this you may find that the rolls start to harden and go stale.
Can this recipe be made in advance? Make the recipe as per the instructions up to when the bun dough is rolled into 32 balls. At this point cover with cling film and place in the fridge. The dough balls can now stay in the fridge overnight as the low temperature will mean a slow rise. In the morning remove from the fridge and leave on the side for an hour to warm up. Arrange on a tray then glaze with egg wash and pipe on the crosses before baking in the oven as per the recipe.
Can this recipe be reheated? As these are HOT cross buns, it is nice to actually eat them whilst still warm. Once cooled you can reheat by wrapping the rolls in foil then place in a hot oven and warm gently for 5 minutes.
Can you freeze mini hot cross buns? Once baked and fully cooled, place the buns in an airtight container or sealable freezer bag and freeze for up to 3 months. Its easier to freeze the buns loose rather than in the tear and share shape. When ready to eat remove from the freezer and either heat each bun for 1-2 minutes in the microwave or leave on the side to fully defrost then wrap in foil and pop in the oven to warm for 5 minutes.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 155kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 22mg | Sodium: 18mg | Potassium: 77mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 110IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in March 2018. Updated in January 2021 with an improved recipe, new ingredients photo, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post Mini Hot Cross Buns (with Chocolate) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/mini-hot-cross-bun-tear-and-share/feed/ 18
Tuscan Ribollita Soup (Healthy Vegetable Soup) https://properfoodie.com/tuscan-ribollita-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/tuscan-ribollita-soup/#comments Wed, 14 Feb 2018 01:05:20 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=6026 Tuscan Ribollita soup (Ribollita Toscana) is a creamy, Italian, full flavoured vegetable soup. Made with store cupboard ingredients and all those leftovers from the week, this budget friendly, autumnal soup is perfect for an easy meal when the nights are starting to draw in. Get this healthy soup made and on the table in less...

Read More

The post Tuscan Ribollita Soup (Healthy Vegetable Soup) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Tuscan Ribollita soup (Ribollita Toscana) is a creamy, Italian, full flavoured vegetable soup. Made with store cupboard ingredients and all those leftovers from the week, this budget friendly, autumnal soup is perfect for an easy meal when the nights are starting to draw in. Get this healthy soup made and on the table in less than 45 minutes.

Ribollita vegetable and bean soup served up in two bowls and topped with crusty bread, grated parmesan and fresh sprigs of thyme.

I'm back dreaming of the those rolling Toscana hills again - I can't help it. I always seem to come back to Italy when I'm cooking from the heart. And this dish really is from the heart. Its a homemade vegetable and bean soup - plain and simple. But this recipe has so much depth, flavour and tradition, that you know it just has to taste amazing.

Why make this recipe?

Tuscan Bean soup comes from making simple foods go a long way and also making sure that those simple foods don't go to waste. Some leftover carrots or celery? chuck em in. Some stale bread? Yep that goes in too! Its all about making the most of what you have and turning leftovers into a meal fit for a king.

This is the perfect recipe for the end of the week when you may have leftovers or food that needs to be used up. Its also really easy to make and super healthy - whats not to like?

If you're after some more Italian flavour and flare have a quick peek at my Amarone Risotto, or my homemade tiramisu, or how about a salami ragu? or if you're feeling really adventurous why not have a go at making your own pasta?

Ingredients

For this Tuscan ribollita soup recipe you will need a few simple ingredients, many of which are cupboard staples or possible leftovers.

Ingredients needed to make this recipe displayed on a table with text labels

Kale: Traditionally this recipe is made with black kale but any kind of kale or cabbage will work well here. I usually add the kale or cabbage at the very end and gently warm for 5 minutes so allowing it to soften whilst maintaining its colour and nutrients.

Parmesan: Freshly grated parmesan or pecorino is simply wonderful in this recipe. It adds a great depth of flavour and lovely a creamy texture. However, if you want to keep this soup strictly vegetarian then make sure to replace with a vegetarian cheese. Or if you want a super healthy vegetable soup then just skip the cheese.

Beans: Cannellini beans work well here as they are white and pearly and stand out against the other ingredients. They are also easy to blend down and so help to create a creamy soup without adding cream, milk, yogurt or cheese. Any other kind of white bean will work just as well.

Vine tomatoes: For the tomatoes I like to use baby vine tomatoes, which are slightly sweeter than the larger version. However, either the baby or the large variety work just as well. Either use two large vine tomatoes sliced and deseeded or weight out around 140g of baby vine tomatoes.

Step-by-Step Instructions

  1. Heat the oil in a large pan. Add the onions and leeks and cook on a medium heat until softened. Add garlic, dried thyme, carrot and celery then stir and continue to cook.
  2. Next add the tomatoes, stock and fresh sprigs of thyme. Stir and bring to the boil. Pop on a lid, reduce the heat and simmer for 15 minutes.
  3. After 15 minutes remove the lid and stir in the cannellini beans and freshly grated parmesan. Cook for a 2-3 minutes.
  4. Next transfer ⅓ of the soup to a blender and blend until smooth.A collage of 4 images showing how to make White bean soup step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Pour the smooth part of the soup back in the chunky soup and mix well.
  6. Stir in the black kale or cabbage. Pop the lid back on and simmer for a further 5 minutes or until the kale has just started to wilt.
  7. Remove the lid, season with sea salt, black pepper and parmesan, then serve.
  8. TIP: To stick the traditional recipe of Tuscan Ribollita soup, line the serving bowls with stale bread (or slices of ciabatta if you prefer) and pour the soup over the top. The bread soaks up the soup and thickens.A collage of 4 images showing how to make white bean soup step by step for instructions 5-8.
Is ribollita soup healthy?

Honestly, this must be the best soup! Each bowl is just under 300 calories, with only 8g fat and 3g saturates. Its also full of veg - as you can probably see, each bowl has a whopping 4 servings of veg in it. Theres also 9g of fibre, 22g protein, 37g carbs, and its high in potassium and vitamin A (good for your heart muscles and your immune system). So you get the picture its nutritious, its well balanced - this is one healthy vegetable soup!

What can I use if I don't have vegetable stock?

You can definitely get by without vegetable stock, vegetable stock is basically vegetables boiled, with herbs and seasoning, to release their flavours and then conveniently packaged for you! just add water in place of the stock and cook the vegetables until they are soft then season the cooking water well.  Add dried Italian seasoning to enhance that authentic flavour!

Why does this recipe use stale bread?

To stick the traditional recipe of Tuscan Ribollita soup, line the serving bowls with stale bread (or slices of ciabatta if you prefer) and pour the soup over the top. The bread soaks up the soup and thickens it.

A Tuscan vegetable and bean soup served up a bowl and topped with crusty bread, grated parmesan and fresh sprigs of thyme.

Other soup recipes you might like:

📖 Recipe

A Tuscan vegetable and bean soup served up in two bowls and topped with crusty bread, grated parmesan and fresh sprigs of thyme.
Print

Tuscan Ribollita Soup

Italian Ribollita soup is a creamy, healthy, full flavoured vegetable soup. Made with store cupboard ingredients and all those leftovers from the week this budget friendly, autumnal soup is perfect for an easy meal when the nights are starting to draw in.
Course Appetizer, Dinner, Main Course, starter
Cuisine Italian, Mediterranean
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 People
Calories 298kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ tbsp. Olive oil
  • 1 large onion 200g finely chopped
  • 1 Leek 80g chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 carrot 150g finely chopped
  • 2 celery 100g sticks finely chopped
  • 2 medium vine tomatoes deseeded and roughly cubed 140g
  • 600 ml vegetable stock plus extra water if required
  • 2 sprigs of fresh thyme
  • 1 tin cannellini beans 240g drained
  • 20 g freshly grated parmesan or vegetarian alternative
  • 100 g black kale or cabbage

Optional

  • Sea salt black pepper and extra parmesan to season
  • Ciabatta or stale bread to serve

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in a large pan. Add the onions and leeks and cook on a medium heat until softened. Add garlic, dried thyme, carrot and celery then stir and continue to cook. Next add the tomatoes, stock and fresh sprigs of thyme. Stir and bring to the boil. Pop on a lid, reduce the heat and simmer for 15 minutes.
  • After 15 minutes remove the lid and stir in the cannellini beans and freshly grated parmesan. Cook for 2-3 minutes.
  • Next transfer ⅓ of the soup to a blender and blend until smooth. Pour the smooth part of the soup back in the chunky soup and mix well. Stir in the black kale. Pop the lid back on and simmer for a further 5 minutes or until the kale has just started to wilt.
  • Remove the lid, season with sea salt, black pepper and parmesan, then serve.

Video

Notes

Recipe tip:
To stick the traditional recipe of Tuscan Ribollita soup, line the serving bowls with stale bread (or slices of ciabatta if you prefer) and pour the soup over the top. The bread soaks up the soup and thickens.
Is ribollita soup healthy?
Honestly, this must be the best soup! Each bowl is just under 300 calories, with only 8g fat and 3g saturates. Its also full of veg - as you can probably see, each bowl has a whopping 4 servings of veg in it. Theres also 9g of fibre, 22g protein, 37g carbs, and its high in potassium and vitamin A (good for your heart muscles and your immune system). So you get the picture its nutritious, its well balanced - this is one healthy vegetable soup!
What can I use if I don't have vegetable stock?
You can definitely get by without vegetable stock, vegetable stock is basically vegetables boiled, with herbs and seasoning, to release their flavours and then conveniently packaged for you! just add water in place of the stock and cook the vegetables until they are soft then season the cooking water well.  Add dried Italian seasoning to enhance that authentic flavour!

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 298kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 800mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 19g

This post was first published in February 2018. Updated in January 2021 with new ingredients photo, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post Tuscan Ribollita Soup (Healthy Vegetable Soup) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/tuscan-ribollita-soup/feed/ 42
American Pancakes https://properfoodie.com/american-pancakes/ https://properfoodie.com/american-pancakes/#comments Thu, 14 Jan 2021 18:15:39 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=3490 Easy to make, light and fluffy American Pancakes recipe. Make your own deliciously soft American pancakes at home using basic store cupboard ingredients. It takes just 15 minute to mix together the pancake batter and 10 minutes to cook off a full batch in the frying pan. Perfect for breakfast in bed, pancake day or...

Read More

The post American Pancakes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Easy to make, light and fluffy American Pancakes recipe. Make your own deliciously soft American pancakes at home using basic store cupboard ingredients. It takes just 15 minute to mix together the pancake batter and 10 minutes to cook off a full batch in the frying pan. Perfect for breakfast in bed, pancake day or even for dessert. For more pancake inspiration see: 5 Easy Recipes for Pancakes.

A stack of pancakes with a piece of butter melting on the top and syrup poured over and drizzling down one side.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

If you are looking for pancakes that are thick, soft and spongy then this is your recipe. Unlike the British pancake, American style pancakes are small and stackable and have a thick spongy texture that is primed for soaking up lashing of syrup.

This is an easy recipe where wet and dry ingredients are simply whisked together in a bowl. For extra fluffiness the egg whites are separated and then whipped separately and folded into the mixture last. However, for speed and ease the eggs can be left whole if you prefer and simply mixed in with the other wet ingredients.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this American Pancakes recipe you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make American style pancakes with text overlay stating each ingredients

Ingredient notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.

Baking powder: American pancakes use a rising agent to make them thick and fluffy

Eggs: This recipe suggests to separate the eggs. The yolks are added in with the other wet ingredients, whilst the whites are whipped up into soft peaks and folded in separately at the end. This helps to create extra fluffy pancakes.

However, if you are happy to forgo extra fluffiness in favour of ease and time, you can just add whole eggs along with the other wet ingredients. The pancakes will still be fluffy due to the baking powder.

Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan and then wiping with a kitchen towel to spread the butter and remove any excess.

Yogurt: The acid in the yogurt helps to activate the baking powder so lifting the pancakes. If preferred this can be substituted with buttermilk, which will have the same affect.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. In a large bowl mix together the flour, caster sugar and baking powder.
  2. In a smaller bowl separate the two egg yolks and whisk together (place the whites to one side for later).
  3. Next add the yogurt and milk to the yolks.
  4. Whisk together well until smooth and fully combined.
    A collage of 4 images showing how to make the recipe step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients and pour in the combined yolks, yogurt and milk.
  6. Whisk everything together into a thick batter.
  7. In a separate smaller bowl whisk the egg whites until soft white peaks form.
  8. Gently fold the egg whites into the pancake mixture.A collage of 4 images showing how to make the recipe step by step for instructions 5-8.
  9. Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a medium heat scoop 1 ladle full of pancake mix into the centre of the pan and cook for a minute or so.
  10. Flip the pancake when bubbles start forming on the top of the batter and cook for a further minute  on the second side.
    A collage of 4 images showing how to make the recipe step by step for instructions 9-10.
  11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil.

💭 Expert tips

  • For extra flavour and texture mix fruit, spices, chocolate chips or spread into the pancake batter. For example try these blueberry pancakes.
  • Don't over mix the batter. Mix enough to just combine, then carefully and gently fold in the egg whites.
  • If your pancakes are sticking to the pan then you need to add more oil or butter and spread it evenly around the whole surface. I usually melt a bit of butter and then use kitchen towel to spread it around and remove any excess.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do I make pancakes fluffy?

Fluffy American pancakes are made by adding a rising agent such as baking powder. An acidic liquid such as yogurt or buttermilk helps to activate baking powder so ensuring a good rise. Extra fluffy pancakes can be made by folding whipped egg whites into the pancake batter.

What is the difference between British and American pancakes?

Unlike British pancakes American pancakes use a leavening agent (baking powder), which release gases and allow the pancakes to rise. Therefore, American pancakes are smaller and thicker than British pancakes.

What to serve with pancakes?

The most simple topping for American style pancakes is butter and maple syrup. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Maple syrup could also be replaced with golden syrup or honey.

Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, banana, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

How do you know when to flip the pancakes?

The indication that its time to flip your pancake is when bubbles begin to appear on the surface of the batter. However, if your pan isn't hot enough the bubbles may not form and the pancake won't cook properly.

More often than not the first pancake is made before the pan is up to temperature and tends not to work out. This is why its often said that the first pancake should be thrown away. However, with patience theres no need for any waste 🙂

A stack of pancakes on a small plate with butter melting on the top and a small glass jug of syrup in the background.

🥞 Other Pancake recipes

📖 Alternatives to pancakes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A stack of American pancakes with a piece of butter melting on the top and syrup poured over and drizzling down one side.
Print

American Pancakes

Easy to make, light and fluffy American Pancakes. Make your own deliciously soft American pancakes at home using basic store cupboard ingredients. It takes just 15 minute to mix together the pancake batter and 10 minutes to cook off a full batch in the frying pan. Perfect for breakfast in bed, pancake day or even for dessert.
Course Breakfast, brunch, Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 8 Pancakes
Calories 110kcal

Ingredients

  • 150 g plain flour
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • 1 tablespoon caster sugar
  • 2 large free range eggs yolks and whites separated
  • 250 ml Greek yogurt
  • 25 ml semi skimmed milk
  • Butter for cooking

Instructions

  • In a large bowl mix together the flour, caster sugar and baking powder.
  • In a smaller bowl separate the two egg yolks and whisk together (place the whites to one side for later).
  • Next add the yogurt and milk to the yolks.
  • Whisk together well until smooth and fully combined.
  • Make a well in the centre of the mixed dry ingredients and pour in the combined yolks, yogurt and milk.
  • Whisk everything together into a thick batter.
  • In a separate smaller bowl whisk the egg whites until soft white peaks form.
  • Gently fold the egg whites into the pancake mixture.
  • Heat a frying pan and melt a knob of butter. Wipe the butter around the pan with a kitchen towel, so removing any excess. With the pan on a medium heat scoop 1 ladle full of pancake mix into the centre of the pan and cook for a minute or so.
  • Flip the pancake when bubbles start forming on the top of the batter and cook for a further minute on the second side.
  • Repeat steps 9 and 10 until all the batter is used. Keep cooked pancakes warm by wrapping in foil.

Notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.
Baking powder: American pancakes use a rising agent to make them thick and fluffy
Eggs: If you want to save time and don’t mind about making your pancakes extra fluffy you can add eggs whole, along with the other wet ingredients, rather than separate.
Butter: The butter is purely for use as a cooking agent but you can use oil if you prefer. I suggest melting the butter in the pan and then wiping with a kitchen towel to spread the butter and remove any excess.
Yogurt: The acid in the yogurt helps to activate the baking powder so lifting the pancakes. If preferred this can be substituted with buttermilk, which will have the same affect.
How do I make pancakes fluffy? Fluffy pancakes are made by adding a rising agent such as baking powder. An acidic liquid such as yogurt or buttermilk helps to activate baking powder so ensuring a good rise. Extra fluffy pancakes can be made by folding whipped egg whites into the pancake batter.
What is the difference between British and American pancakes? Unlike British pancakes American pancakes use a leavening agent (baking powder), which release gases and allow the pancakes to rise. Therefore, American pancakes are smaller and thicker than British pancakes.
What to serve with pancakes? The most simple topping for American style pancakes is butter and maple syrup. The butter can be left out if preferred but I do like the nutty and slightly salty flavour that the butter adds. Maple syrup could also be replaced with golden syrup or honey. Other toppings you may want to use could include berries, banana, mango, nutella, cream, yogurt, chocolate chips, nuts and seeds.

Nutrition

Serving: 40g | Calories: 110kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 43mg | Sodium: 82mg | Potassium: 79mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 59IU | Calcium: 76mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in February 2017. Updated in January 2021 with an improved recipe, new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post American Pancakes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/american-pancakes/feed/ 11
Chicken and leeks recipe https://properfoodie.com/chicken-and-leek-recipe/ https://properfoodie.com/chicken-and-leek-recipe/#comments Sat, 17 Aug 2019 08:38:09 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10629 A simple chicken and leeks recipe made with creamy mustard and tarragon sauce. Perfect for a Saturday night in or as an easy Sunday dinner idea!  This tasty leek dish is also great as a base for chicken leek pie or leek and chicken pasta recipes! This incredibly easy chicken and leeks recipe is already...

Read More

The post Chicken and leeks recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A simple chicken and leeks recipe made with creamy mustard and tarragon sauce. Perfect for a Saturday night in or as an easy Sunday dinner idea!  This tasty leek dish is also great as a base for chicken leek pie or leek and chicken pasta recipes!

chicken and leek recipe

This incredibly easy chicken and leeks recipe is already winging its way to the top of my list of favourites; and with good reason. Its creamy, but not unhealthy, filling but not heavy, and fragrant but not overpowering. Pretty much your perfect chicken dinner.

The basis of this classic recipe is a creamy chicken and leek broth infused with sweet tarragon and spicy mustard seeds. I could eat it all day just as it is, but the joy of this recipe is that it can also be used as the starting point for many other chicken and leek recipes. Recipes with chicken are so versatile but there is something special about this delicious sauce and tarragon chicken. 

If your after chicken thats a little less saucy, why not try my easy roast chicken recipe? or for more dinner inspiration check out my dinner ideas for two collection.

Chicken and Leeks Recipe Ingredients

For this delightful chicken and leeks recipe you will need:

  • Oil
  • Chicken breasts
  • Salt and pepper
  • Lemon juice
  • Leeks
  • Garlic
  • Plain flour
  • Chicken stock
  • Milk
  • Wholegrain mustard
  • Creme fraiche
  • Fresh tarragon

TIP: Leeks are a delicious vegetable full of wonderful flavour, but they are grown in the ground in sandy soil. They need a good cleaning before you use them for cooking. If you’re not sure how to clean leeks, it’s easy—give them a good rinse under cold water to remove dirt or sand.

TIP-Creme Fraiche: You may substitute sour cream or plain yogurt for creme fraiche if you are unable to find it.

You could also use ramps to put a spin on your chicken and leek recipes by making this a ramps recipe. What are ramps: ramps are essentially wild leeks with a strong, delicious flavour similar to onions that’s stronger than leeks.

What herbs go with chicken?

Chicken goes well with so many herbs, in particular rosemary, garlic, thyme, oregano and coriander. It also works really well with tarragon, which is what is used in this chicken and leek recipe. The sweet aniseed flavour of tarragon also works really well with the creamy, mustard flavoured chicken and leek broth. I use a similar combination of flavours in my mustard and tarragon chicken bliss recipe.

How to Cook Leeks with Chicken

  1. First prepare the chicken: Place cling film under and over the chicken breasts and the bash with a rolling pin to flatten the meat to around half a cm in thickness.flatten chicken breasts with a rolling pin
  2. Drizzle oil over the chicken and then season with salt, pepper and lemon juice
  3. Place a large frying pan on the heat and then add the chicken breasts. Cook on each side for 2-3 minutes or until golden brown. Then remove from the pan and set to one side.pan fry chicken breast until golden on both sides
  4. Next prepare the chicken and leek broth: Using the same pan, add a little more oil and then gently fry the chopped leeks
  5. Whilst the leeks are cooking add some finely chopped garlic and stir in well.pan fry chopped leeks and garlic
  6. Once the leeks have softened stir in 2 tablespoon flour and then gradually add the stock and milk.stir in stock
  7. When the broth starts to simmer return the chicken to the pan and cook with the lid on for 20 minutes.return the chicken to the pan
  8. After 20 minutes remove the lid and stir 1 teaspoon of wholegrain mustard and 3 tablespoon of creme fraiche into the chicken and leek broth.stir creme fraiche into Chicken and leek recipe
  9. Finish by stirring in some fresh tarragon leaves.stir in fresh tarragon leaves
  10. Serve with your choice of veg or potatoes.serve the chicken and leeks with your choice of veg or potatoes

What can I make with chicken and leeks?

This recipe can be used as the starting point to create a variety of chicken and leek recipes. This includes: chicken and leek pie, chicken and leek soup and chicken and leek pasta. For the chicken leek pie and chicken leek soup the cooked chicken will need to be removed and shredded and the remaining ingredients should be reduced down for the pie or blended (smooth or chunky) for the soup. The chicken can also be shredded for chicken leek pasta but also works with the whole breast served on top of the pasta.

What to Eat with Chicken and Leeks

This recipe works really well with a simple vegetable accompaniment such as green vegetable salad, green bean almondine or honey glazed carrots and parsnips. Chicken and leeks also goes amazingly well with any type of potato, try it with foil pack potatoes or Irish mashed potatoes.

chicken and leek recipe

Chicken breast recipes for dinner are so versatile and a perfect solution when you are looking for easy dinner ideas for the family. Try this simple chicken and leeks recipe at home for your next cosy night in – you won’t be disappointed.

📖 Recipe

chicken and leeks
Print

Chicken and leek recipe

A simple chicken and leek recipe made with flavoursome broth, perfect as it is for an easy dinner or use as a tasty base for chicken pie or chicken and leek pasta.
Course Dinner, Main Course, tea
Cuisine British
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
0 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 286.1kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon Oil
  • 4 Chicken breasts (575g)
  • Salt and pepper
  • Juice from half a lemon
  • 2 Leeks quartered length ways and then roughly chopped (275g)
  • 1 clove Garlic finely chopped
  • 2 tablespoon Plain flour
  • 450 ml Chicken stock
  • 150 ml semi skimmed Milk
  • 1 teaspoon Wholegrain mustard
  • 3 tablespoon Creme fraiche
  • Handful fresh tarragon leaves (20g)

Instructions

First prepare the chicken:

  • Place cling film under and over the chicken breasts and the bash with a rolling pin to flatten the meat to around half a cm in thickness.
  • Drizzle oil over one side of the chicken and then season with salt, pepper and lemon juice. Flip the chicken over and repeat.
  • Place a large frying pan on the heat and then add the chicken breasts. Cook on each side for 2-3 minutes or until golden brown. Then remove from the pan and set to one side.

Next prepare the chicken and leek broth

  • Using the same pan, add a little more oil and then gently fry the chopped leeks.
  • Whilst the leeks are cooking add some finely chopped garlic and stir in well.
  • Once the leeks have softened, stir in 2 tablespoon flour and then gradually add the stock and milk.
  • When the broth starts to simmer return the chicken to the pan and cook with the lid on for 20 minutes.
  • After 20 minutes remove the lid and stir 1 teaspoon of wholegrain mustard and 3 tablespoon of creme fraiche into the chicken and leek broth.
  • Finish by stirring in some fresh tarragon leaves before serving with your choice of veg or potatoes.

Video

Notes

Click here to see traffic light nutritional info for this recipe
TIP: Leeks are a delicious vegetable full of wonderful flavour, but they are grown in the ground in sandy soil. They need a good cleaning before you use them for cooking. If you’re not sure how to clean leeks, it’s easy—give them a good rinse under cold water to remove dirt or sand.
TIP-Creme Fraiche: You may substitute sour cream or plain yogurt for creme fraiche if you are unable to find it.
You could also use ramps to put a spin on your chicken and leek recipes by making this a ramps recipe. What are ramps: ramps are essentially wild leeks with a strong, delicious flavour similar to onions that’s stronger than leeks.

Nutrition

Serving: 391g | Calories: 286.1kcal | Carbohydrates: 9.6g | Protein: 40.6g | Fat: 9.7g | Saturated Fat: 3.9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 440mg | Fiber: 0.6g | Sugar: 3.7g

I first shared this Chicken and leeks recipe on the Sunday Supper Movement site where I am a contributor.

The post Chicken and leeks recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/chicken-and-leek-recipe/feed/ 11
Vietnamese Style Beef Salad https://properfoodie.com/vietnamese-beef-salad/ https://properfoodie.com/vietnamese-beef-salad/#respond Thu, 02 Apr 2020 18:36:27 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11635 Vietnamese style beef salad is thinly sliced steak served over a bed of healthy rice noodles with an aromatic, zesty salad dressing and colourful fresh veggies. With its nutritious ingredients and bright flavours, including a pop of mint, this Asian style beef salad recipe is guaranteed to put a smile on your face. It will...

Read More

The post Vietnamese Style Beef Salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Vietnamese style beef salad is thinly sliced steak served over a bed of healthy rice noodles with an aromatic, zesty salad dressing and colourful fresh veggies. With its nutritious ingredients and bright flavours, including a pop of mint, this Asian style beef salad recipe is guaranteed to put a smile on your face. It will be your new favourite steak salad recipe!

Slices of rare steak over rice noodles and salad in a bowl

Salads are always so much better with the addition of a few vibrant, fresh ingredients. Asian flavours tend to be aromatic and spicy, like in this spicy Chinese chicken recipe and this Keto Beef and Broccoli, which makes for the best green salads!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

My favourite salads always have a pop of flavour that sets them apart. This flavour is usually from herbs or salad dressings. Like the fragrant basil in this Italian pasta salad, the sweet fennel in orange and fennel salad or the fresh coriander and chilli in this mango and avocado salad. In the case of this Vietnamese beef salad recipe those zesty Asian style flavours work perfectly in a simple, zesty marinade for the beef and in an easy salad dressing with fresh lime for drizzling on top!

Beef noodle salad served up in 3 bowls with a small jug of salad dressing in the centre

🥘 What you will need to make this recipe

Full ingredients & recipe instructions in recipe card below: JUMP TO RECIPE CARD

To make rice noodle salad for 4 people you will need the following ingredients:

Salad ingredients

  • 2 rump steaks 2 x 8oz
  • 2 medium carrots peeled and cut into julienne strips
  • 1 large cucumber sliced into ribbons with a veg peeler
  • 2 baby gem lettuce roughly chopped
  • Handful of fresh coriander roughly chopped
  • 10-15 fresh mint leaves torn
  • Red chilli finely sliced with seeds left in
  • 1 cup dried rice noodles

Beef marinade ingredients

  • Juice of 2 limes
  • 1 tsp fish sauce
  • 1 tsp garlic ginger paste

Garlic Ginger paste substitute: If you have trouble finding garlic ginger paste, you can make your own by mixing equal parts minced garlic and ginger. Add a little olive oil if the paste is too thick.

Salad dressing ingredients

  • 2 tbsp sesame oil
  • Juice of 1 lime
  • 1 tsp fish sauce
  • 1 tbsp honey
beef rice noodle salad served in a bowl

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Make marinade: Mix together the juice of 2 limes, 1 teaspoon fish sauce and 1 teaspoon of garlic ginger paste. marinade for the beef
  2. Marinade steak: Pour the marinade over room temp steaks, cover and soak for at least 20 minutes.pouring lime marinade over steaks
  3. Cook noodles: Place the noodles in a bowl and cover with boiling water. Leave to sit for 1 minute then drain and rinse under the cold water tap.pouring hot water over uncooked noodles
  4. Prepare salad: Peel, slice and chop the salad, herbs and chilli and place in a large bowl along with cooled noodles. Cover and place in the fridge.salad ingredients and cooked noodles in large mixing bowl
  5. Cook steaks: Pan fry in a hot griddle pan for 3-4 minutes on each side (for pink in the middle). Guidance on steak cooking times. Loosely wrap cooked steaks in foil and rest for 3-5 minutes.frying steaks in griddle pan
  6. Make salad dressing: Mix together 2 tablespoon sesame oil, juice of 1 lime, 1 teaspoon fish sauce and 1 tablespoon honey. Mix well.making salad dressing for beef salad
  7. Serve: Toss together the chopped salad and noodles and divide between 4 bowls. Thinly slice the steak and place on top of the salad in each bowl. Pour over the Asian salad dressing and serve.serving salad with sliced beef and Vietnamese dressing
Step by step pictures for making Vietnamese beef salad

🥄 Asian salad dressing

The Asian salad dressing for this Vietnamese beef noodle salad uses just four ingredients. For that classic sweet and sour Asian flare simply combine sesame oil, lime juice, fish sauce and honey. Mix well into an emulsion.

🥒 How to cut cucumber into ribbons

  1. Using a knife, cut off both ends of a whole cucumber. Discard the ends.
  2. Carefully slice the length of the cucumber into long, thin ribbons using a vegetable peeler.
  3. When you reach the seeds, turn the cucumber a quarter of the way and repeat. Do this as many times as necessary to cut the cucumber entirely into ribbons.

🐄 What is the best cut of beef to use?

Rump or sirloin steaks that can be pan fried in minutes will provide delicious pink strips of beef to top this Vietnamese noodle salad (cook for longer if you prefer your steak medium-well done).

Easy Asian recipes tend to be quick and simple to make due to the short cooking time and easy preparation. This Asian beef salad can be made and served up in next to no time by using beef steaks, either rump or sirloin, which are quick to cook, tender and juicy, and easy to slice and serve.

Vietnamese style noodle salad recipe wth sliced steak served up in 2 bowls

💭 Recipe tips

Remove the steaks from the fridge and place them in a bowl at least a half an hour before you plan to cook them. This allows time for the marinade to soak in and for the steaks to come up to room temperature.

Don’t move the steaks or flip them during the 4 minutes on each side cooking time. If they begin to smoke a lot, reduce the heat slightly.

It is very important to let your steaks rest after pan frying. Keep them loosely wrapped in foil for the 3-5 minutes of resting time. This will keep them hot but allow them to rest as necessary.

The Asian salad dressing will separate if left to sit. Give it a stir before pouring it over your salad.

Best cut of beef to use: Rump or sirloin steaks that can be pan fried in minutes will provide delicious pink strips of beef to top this Vietnamese noodle salad (cook for longer if you prefer your steak medium-well done).

🥗 What to serve with this recipe

Vietnamese beef salad goes deliciously with other easy Asian recipes like Blistered Shishito Peppers and Shrimp ShumaiSushi Rolls and Thai Sausage Rolls are a delicious choice to pair it with, too!

This particular Vietnamese beef salad recipe is served with rice noodles. However, you can swap these for other varieties of noodles such as Chinese egg noodles or Japanese ramen noodles. The lighter, thinner noodles tend to work best.

If you prefer you can leave the noodles out all together and instead add extra vegetables like bean sprouts or extra herbs like parsley or Thai basil. You could even make it a rice bowl and serve it over a bed of perfect fluffy rice.

No matter how you put this easy beef salad recipe together, it’s going to be delicious!

🍖 Other steak recipes

Let me know what you think of this recipe by leaving a comment and rating below! You can also save this recipe on pinterest. Or if you prefer you can pin the video!

📖 Recipe

Vietnamese beef salad
Print

📋 Vietnamese Style Beef Salad

Vietnamese beef salad with healthy rice noodles and a lime, Asian salad dressing. This aromatic and zesty Beef salad recipe will surely bring out many a smile with its nutritious ingredients and satisfying Asian flavours.
Course main meal, starter or main
Cuisine Asian, Vietnamese
Prep Time 1 hour 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 272kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Griddle pan

Ingredients

For the salad:

  • 2 rump steaks 2 x 8oz
  • 2 medium carrots peeled and cut into julienne strips
  • 1 large cucumber sliced into ribbons with a veg peeler
  • 2 baby gem lettuce roughly chopped
  • Handful of fresh coriander roughly chopped
  • 10-15 fresh mint leaves torn
  • Red chilli finely sliced with seeds left in
  • 1 cup dried rice noodles

For the beef marinade:

  • Juice of 2 limes
  • 1 teaspoon fish sauce
  • 1 teaspoon garlic ginger paste

For the Asian salad dressing:

  • 2 tablespoon sesame oil
  • Juice of 1 lime
  • 1 teaspoon fish sauce
  • 1 tablespoon honey

Instructions

  • Remove steaks from fridge and bring up to room temperature. In a small dish make up the marinade by mixing together the juice of 2 limes, 1 teaspoon fish sauce and 1 teaspoon of garlic ginger paste. Pour the marinade over the steaks, cover and allow to soak for at least 20 minutes.
    marinade for the beef
  • Peel slice and chop the carrots, cucumber, lettuce leaves, fresh coriander, mint leaves and red chilli. Chop and slice these to your liking or as directed in the above ingredients list.
    Place the prepared salad in a large bowl.
    salad ingredients and cooked noodles in large mixing bowl
  • Cooking rice noodles is so, so simple. Just place the noodles in a bowl and cover with boiling water from the kettle. Leave to sit for 1 minute then drain and rinse under the cold water tap.
    Add the cooked noodles to the bowl with the rest of the salad, then cover and place in the fridge.
    pouring hot water over uncooked noodles
  • Place a griddle pan on a medium heat. When the pan is hot, carefully place in the steaks. Cook on each side for 3-4 minutes (for pink in the middle). Guidance on steak cooking times.
    TIP: Don't be tempted to move the steaks during each of the 4 minutes. If they begin to smoke a lot, reduce the heat slightly.
    frying steaks in griddle pan
  • Its really important to rest your steak once its been pan fried.
    Remove from the pan and loosely wrap in foil. Leave on the side for at least 3 minutes before slicing and serving.
    wrapping steaks in foil to rest
  • In a small bowl mix together 2 tablespoon sesame oil, juice of 1 lime, 1 teaspoon fish sauce and 1 tablespoon honey. Mix well into an emulsion.
    TIP: The dressing will separate if left to sit - so remember to give it a final stir before pouring over your Asian salad.
    making salad dressing
  • Remove the salad bowl from the fridge. Toss and mix together the chopped salad and noodles. Divide the noodle salad between 4 bowls. 
    mixing salad and noodles
  • Next, unwrap the steak and transfer to a chopping board. Thinly slice the steak and place the beef strips on top of the salad in each bowl.
    Finally, pour over the Asian salad dressing and serve. 
    serving salad with sliced beef and Vietnamese dressing

Video

Notes

  • Remove the steaks from the fridge and place them in a bowl at least a half an hour before you plan to cook them. This allows time for the marinade to soak in and for the steaks to come up to room temperature.
  • Don’t move the steaks or flip them during the 4 minutes on each side cooking time. If they begin to smoke a lot, reduce the heat slightly.
  • It is very important to let your steaks rest after pan frying. Keep them loosely wrapped in foil for the 3-5 minutes of resting time. This will keep them hot but allow them to rest as necessary.
  • The Asian salad dressing will separate if left to sit. Give it a stir before pouring it over your salad.
  • Best cut of beef to use: Rump or sirloin steaks that can be pan fried in minutes will provide delicious pink strips of beef to top this Vietnamese noodle salad (cook for longer if you prefer your steak medium-well done).
Nutritional info Vietnamese salad

Nutrition

Serving: 305g | Calories: 272kcal | Carbohydrates: 12.4g | Protein: 29.7g | Fat: 11.8g | Saturated Fat: 3.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4.4g | Sodium: 120mg | Potassium: 763.1mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 6.7g | Vitamin A: 855.2IU | Vitamin C: 14.6mg | Calcium: 52.2mg | Iron: 3.2mg

I first shared this Beef Noodle Salad recipe on the Best Beef Recipes site where I am a contributor.

The post Vietnamese Style Beef Salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/vietnamese-beef-salad/feed/ 0
Fajita Chicken salad https://properfoodie.com/fajita-chicken-salad/ https://properfoodie.com/fajita-chicken-salad/#respond Tue, 05 Jan 2016 22:52:58 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1558 Spicy fajita chicken salad served with rice. Chicken fajita platter Happy New Year! My first creation of the year is this delicious (and healthy) fajita spiced chicken platter. Its loaded with chicken and rice, which are both smothered in the rich flavours of cumin and paprika - yum! The addition of the salad gives an...

Read More

The post Fajita Chicken salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Spicy fajita chicken salad served with rice.

Fajita Chicken Platter|Properfoodie.com

Chicken fajita platter

Happy New Year!

My first creation of the year is this delicious (and healthy) fajita spiced chicken platter. Its loaded with chicken and rice, which are both smothered in the rich flavours of cumin and paprika - yum! The addition of the salad gives an extra crunch and the creamy avocado complements the spicy fajita sauce perfectly. It might just be the perfect healthy dish needed to kick-start 2016!

I’m always up for a platter of food, be it at home or dining out. I’d like to think this is because I enjoying sharing my dinner 🙂 …but it’s more likely because I enjoy the super large quantity that’s presented on arrival of said platter. And yes I’m first to start and more often than not; last to finish 🙂

Chicken fajitas

So this dish takes all the main ingredients of chicken fajitas (minus the wrap) and lays out all its colourful ingredients on one mouth-watering platter; all you need to do is dive in with a fork.

So we already know how well a smoky fajita sauce combines oh so well with chunks of juicy chicken and crunchy bell pepper, particularly when topped with guacamole, cheese, salsa, sour cream...and anything else with an extra boost of calories and fat that I can get my hands on. However, as it is New Year and overindulgence was on the cards last months, this recipe tries to keep only the healthy elements without cutting back on taste. The serving of avocado on a bed of lettuce provides a lovely alternative to guacamole and the helping of rice not only soaks up any escaping drizzles of fajita sauce but also saves on the need for any tortilla wraps. Healthy but by no means boring!! Enjoy!

Wraps

If your after something with wraps then why not try chicken tinga burritos, paprika chicken wraps or beef brisket burritos.

📖 Recipe

Fajita spiced chicken platter with avocado salad
Print

Fajita Spiced Chicken Platter

Spicy fajita chicken salad served with rice.
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes

Ingredients

For the Fajita sauce:

  • Juice of 1 lime
  • 1 tablespoon rapeseed oil
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander

For the platter:

  • 2 chicken breasts sliced into strips along the width of breast
  • 1 red onion cut into eighths
  • ½ red pepper cut into 3cm chunks
  • ½ orange pepper cut into 3cm chunks
  • 1 red chilli deseeded and sliced
  • 250 g rice
  • Iceburg lettuce
  • Avocado stone removed and sliced
  • Lime wedges to serve

Instructions

  • First mix the sauce in a bowl by combining the lime juice, oil and spices. Season the sliced chicken then add to the sauce and mix well to ensure chicken is fully coated.
  • Heat a large frying pan or wok. Once hot, pour in the chicken and bring sauce to a simmer and cook chicken for 5 minutes.
  • Next add the onion, chilli and peppers to the pan. Mix well to coat vegetables with the sauce then cover with a lid and leave to simmer for 10 minutes, stirring occasionally.
  • Meanwhile, cook the rice according to the instructions and prepare the salad. If serving up on a platter; simply arrange a few lettuce leaves on the top third of the board and cover with slices of avocado. Finish off with a drizzle of olive oil and season with salt and pepper.
  • Once the rice is cooked, drain and spoon out along the bottom third of the board. Check the chicken and veg are thoroughly cooked then spoon out down the middle section of the board. Cut a couple of limes into wedges and dot around the edges of the board before presenting in the middle of the table.

 

The post Fajita Chicken salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/fajita-chicken-salad/feed/ 0
Chicken Satay and Quinoa Salad https://properfoodie.com/chicken-satay-quinoa-salad/ https://properfoodie.com/chicken-satay-quinoa-salad/#comments Tue, 08 Aug 2017 22:04:55 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=4605    Juicy Chicken pieces smothered in a sweet Satay Sauce, with a good helping of Squash & Edamame Quinoa Salad, and extra sauce for dipping  Chicken Satay Chicken Satay is the perfect summer comfort food. Its warm and creamy, yet light and refreshing, with plenty of Asian flavours knocking about to ensure your tastebuds will...

Read More

The post Chicken Satay and Quinoa Salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
   Juicy Chicken pieces smothered in a sweet Satay Sauce, with a good helping of Squash & Edamame Quinoa Salad, and extra sauce for dipping 

chicken satay with satay sauce

Chicken Satay

Chicken Satay is the perfect summer comfort food. Its warm and creamy, yet light and refreshing, with plenty of Asian flavours knocking about to ensure your tastebuds will not be disappointed. Sauces, condiments and dressings can sometimes be the trickiest part of a recipe, but often this is the very thing that makes a meal really great. This satay sauce is so quick and so simple that it leaves no excuses for not turning a simple piece of Chicken into a really fantastic dinner.

chicken satay with quinoa salad

And just to show off how easy and super duper this dish really is, and to let you know how much I love it, theres not 1 but 2 videos below. Thats right - I'm getting super fancy now with videos as well as photos!!

Satay Ingredients

My satay sauce requires no more than soy sauce, peanut butter and tahini with a teaspoon of coriander, a squeeze of lime juice and grated ginger and garlic.

satay ingredients listed

Quinoa Salad

Because this is most definitely a summer dish, I love to serve my chicken satay with a full flavoured quinoa salad.

Fluffy quinoa mixed with squash, mint and edamame beans help keep this salad bright, refreshing, healthy and of course mega tasty.

Quinoa ingredients listed

Quinoa is one of the easiest grains to cook. Just cover with stock, pop on a lid, simmer for 15 minutes or until all the liquid has been absorbed, then set to one side with the lid on for 10 minutes, before fluffing up with a fork.

To make this recipe even more lovable and mid-week worthy; make the sauce ahead of time and use as a marinade for the chicken until you are ready to cook. The quinoa salad will also keep well in the fridge, if made the day before.

chicken satay with quinoa salad

If you love this satay sauce recipe, check out my easy tikka paste recipe which is also great with chicken and good to keep handy in the fridge.

**Estimated nutritional information per serving of chicken satay and quinoa salad and per 100g. If you want to find out more about how the information is calculated and the sources used, please refer to my Nutrition Information Guide.

Watch how to make squash and edamame quinoa salad

1 hour 30 minutes to make recipe1 of 5 a day recipe gluten free recipe high in protein recipe

📖 Recipe

Chicken satay
Print

Chicken Satay and Quinoa Salad

Juicy chicken breasts smothered and baked in a sweet satay sauce, with a good helping of squash and edamame quinoa salad and extra sauce for dipping
Course Dinner, lunch
Cuisine Asian, Indonesian
Prep Time 45 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 4 People
Calories 586kcal

Ingredients

For the Chicken Satay

  • 2 Chicken Breasts
  • 1 clove garlic
  • 2 cm piece of ginger peeled
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • 1 tablespoon light soy sauce for gluten free recipe check soy sauce is a gluten free version
  • 2 tablespoon smooth peanut butter
  • 2 tablespoon Tahini
  • 1 Juice of lime
  • 50 ml cold water

for the quinoa salad

  • 100 g dried quinoa
  • 500 ml veg stock
  • ½ Juice of lime
  • 150 g butternut squash - skin removed and squash cubed
  • 50 g edamame beans
  • Handful of fresh mint leaves
  • Black pepper

To Garnish

  • Extra mint leaves
  • Chopped cashew nuts
  • Fresh cornflowers if desired

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C

For the Chicken satay

  • In a large bowl grate the ginger and garlic, then add the dried coriander, soy sauce, peanut butter, tahini, lime juice and water. Whisk together well until smooth a creamy. Spoon out a few large spoonfuls of the satay sauce and set to one side to serve as dip later on.
  • Using a sharp knife score one side of the chicken breasts with 3 diagonal cuts (this allows the satay to soak into the middle of the chicken). Place the chicken into the bowl of sauce and coat well. Cover the bowl and place in the fridge to marinade for at least 30 minutes, if you have time marinate over night.

For the Quinoa salad

  • Place the cubed squash on a baking tray, drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle over the paprika. Place in the pre heated over and bake for 20 minutes. Check half way through and turn.
  • Meanwhile put the quinoa in a small pan, cover with the stock and pop on a lid. Bring to the boil and then simmer for 15 minutes or until all the water has absorbed. Take off the heat, add juice from half a lime and set to one side with the lid still on for 10 minutes. Then fluff up with a fork, and add the baked squash, edamame beans, mint leaves and black pepper. Mix carefully with a fork. Keep in the fridge until you are ready to serve.

To cook the chicken:

  • Transfer the chicken to an oven proof dish and pour over any excess sauce. Place in the middle of a pre heated oven and bake for 25-30 minutes. Remove from the oven and slice in half on the diagonal, check its cooked through.

To serve

  • Spoon out the quinoa salad and place the chicken on top before finishing off with chopped cashews, cornflower petals and extra wedges of lime.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 393g | Calories: 586kcal | Carbohydrates: 42.4g | Protein: 48.5g | Fat: 26.2g | Saturated Fat: 5.5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10.3g | Fiber: 5g

Chicken satay with squash and edamame quinoa salad

I am linking this recipe to #cookblogshare hosted by hijackedbytwins, recipesmadeeasyeverydayhealthyrecipes and Easypeasyfoodie. I am also linking to #brilliantblogposts by honestmum, #CookOnceEatTwice hosted by seachingforspice, and #recipeoftheweek hosted by aMummyToo.

Hijacked By Twins

Brilliant blog posts on HonestMum.comCook Once Eat Twice

Link up your recipe of the week

The post Chicken Satay and Quinoa Salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/chicken-satay-quinoa-salad/feed/ 15
Turkey Meatballs with Moroccan Couscous https://properfoodie.com/moroccan-meatballs-cous-cous/ https://properfoodie.com/moroccan-meatballs-cous-cous/#comments Wed, 08 Nov 2017 01:57:58 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5316 Turkey Meatballs in an aromatic Moroccan sauce with roasted veg and giant couscous salad Healthy Turkey Meatballs in a Moroccan meatballs sauce is definitely one of the best ways to enjoy minced turkey. The fact that its high in protein and low in fat is just an added bonus, because these amazing meatballs in this...

Read More

The post Turkey Meatballs with Moroccan Couscous appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Turkey Meatballs in an aromatic Moroccan sauce with roasted veg and giant couscous salad

moroccan meatballs with cous cous

Healthy Turkey Meatballs in a Moroccan meatballs sauce is definitely one of the best ways to enjoy minced turkey. The fact that its high in protein and low in fat is just an added bonus, because these amazing meatballs in this delicious Moroccan sauce taste incredible.  A good helping of meatballs and giant couscous contains less than 500kcal, under 2g of saturates, and 2 portions of veggies.

For another Moroccan twist on the nutritious turkey why not check out my Slow Cooker Turkey Tagine?

turkey meatballs

Meatball sauce

I just love Moroccan Tagine flavours, all that warm, rich, sweet flavour, with prunes and root veggies, and yummy couscous on the side. Its all so moreish and wonderful. For my Moroccan style meatball sauce I use chicken stock, passata, ras el hanout paste, ginger and mixed spice.

A bonus about this dish is that the Moroccan sauce is separate and so its up to you whether the whole lot goes all over the meatballs, or of its drizzled on top of the couscous, or if its kept to the side as a dip.

Personally, I prefer the whole lot poured all over the meatballs with a bit of creme fraiche on the side.

turkey meatballs

Turkey Meatballs with Moroccan Couscous recipe ingredients

The ingredients you will need to make this recipe are:

For the Cous Cous Salad

  • 150g courgette diced
  • 150g aubergine diced
  • 100g red onion
  • 210g tinned chickpeas (130g drained)
  • drizzle of oil
  • black pepper
  • 170g giant cous cous
  • 250ml chicken stock

For the meatballs

  • 500g minced turkey
  • 1 medium egg whisked
  • 40g breadcrumbs
  • 130g pitted prunes roughly chopped
  • 200ml passata
  • 200ml chicken stock
  • 4 teaspoon ras el hanout paste
  • 0.5 teaspoon ginger
  • 0.5 teaspoon mixed spice

turkey meatballs with cous cous

How to make Turkey Meatballs

  1. In a large bowl mix together the turkey mince, egg, prunes and breadcrumbs.
  2. Use your hands to form small meatballs from the turkey mixture. Place shaped meatballs onto the large plate.
  3. Place a griddle pan on a high heat and add a drizzle of olive oil.
  4. Gently transfer the meatballs to the heat pan and brown all over - turn the meatballs to give an even colouring
  5. For the sauce add the stock, passata, ras el hanout paste, ginger and mixed spice to a small bowl or jug - mix together well and then pour over the meatballs
  6. Add the Place a lid over the meatball pan and simmer them in the sauce for a good 10 minutes. Ensure meatballs are cooked through (nice a firm) before serving.

moroccan meatballs

How do you keep meatballs from falling apart?

The key to making your meatballs hold together is the egg and the breadcrumbs.  The egg and the breadcrumbs combine to bind the meatballs but too many breadcrumbs can dry the meatballs too much and cause the to break.  The breadcrumbs should be added to a meatball mix until it can be shaped without feeling too soggy.  When these meatballs are browned you should have achieved the Best Turkey Meatballs!

moroccan meatballs with giant cous cous

Can you cook meatballs from frozen?

The meatballs in this recipe can be made ahead of time and frozen for a quick evening meal any day of the week.  Meatballs should be cooked in the sauce and then cooled and frozen immediately.

The meatballs will keep in the freezer for around 3 months but should be consumed sooner if possible.

Defrost the meatballs and reheat in a pan or a wok until piping hot throughout. serve and enjoy.

moroccan meatballs

The couscous is a really simple salad, which is the perfect accompaniment to these Moroccan meatballs. The veg and chickpeas are roasted in the oven, whilst the giant couscous simmers on the hob. When ready, just mix together and serve.

meatballs and giant cous cous

Absolutely stunning - I could eat these Moroccan meatballs all day long.

 under 500 calorie recipe1 hour to make recipe2 of 5 a day recipehigh in protein recipe

📖 Recipe

turkey meatballs
Print

Turkey Meatballs with Moroccan Couscous

Course Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine Moroccan
Prep Time 35 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 495kcal

Ingredients

For the Cous Cous Salad

  • 150 g Courgette diced
  • 150 g aubergine diced
  • 100 g red onion
  • 210 g tinned chickpeas 130g drained
  • Drizzle of oil
  • Black pepper
  • 170 g Giant CousCous I used Merchant Gourmets giant couscous
  • 250 ml chicken stock

For the meatballs

  • 500 g minced Turkey
  • 1 medium egg whisked
  • 40 g breadcrumbs
  • 130 g pitted prunes roughly chopped
  • 200 ml passata
  • 200 ml chicken stock
  • 4 teaspoon Ras el hanout paste available in most supermarkets
  • 0.5 teaspoon ginger
  • 0.5 teaspoon mixed spice

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C

For the Couscous Salad

  • Place the diced courgette, aubergine, red onion and chickpeas into a large bowl. Add the oil and pepper then mix together well ensuring the vegetables are well coated with the oil. Next transfer the veggies onto a baking tray and spread out. Place the tray in the centre of the oven and bake for 20-25 minutes. Check half way and turn with a spatula.
  • Meanwhile place the couscous in a small saucepan add the stock, cover with a lid and then place on a medium heat. Bring to the boil and simmer for 8 minutes. Remove the pan off the heat and leave to stand with the lid on for at least 5 minutes. drain off any water still remaining and then fluff the couscous with a fork.
  • Once the veggies are cooked remove from the oven and mix in with the cooked couscous - set to one side ready to serve later on.

For the meatballs

  • In a large bowl mix together the turkey mince, egg, prunes and breadcrumbs. Place a large empty plate or tray at the side of the bowl.use your hands to form small meatballs from the turkey mixture. Place shaped meatballs onto the large plate. Once all the turkey has been made into meatballs place a large frying pan or griddle pan on a high heat and add a drizzle of olive oil. Gently transfer the meatballs to the heat pan and brown all over - use tongues to constantly turn the meatballs to give an even colouring all over. Remove from the heat.
  • Next add the stock, passata, ras el hanout paste, ginger and mixed spice to a small bowl or jug - mix together well and then pour over the meatballs (hold back some of the sauce and heat separately if you would like some for the couscous or some to use as dip). Place a lid over the meatball pan and simmer them in the sauce for a good 10 minutes. Ensure meatballs are cooked through (nice a firm) before serving.
  • Serve the meatballs alongside the couscous salad with chopped parsley and creme fraiche.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 495kcal | Carbohydrates: 59g | Protein: 43g | Fat: 7.1g | Saturated Fat: 1.6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2.4g | Fiber: 4.4g

Moroccan meatballs with giant cous cous and roasted veg

The post Turkey Meatballs with Moroccan Couscous appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/moroccan-meatballs-cous-cous/feed/ 12
Tuna Steak Recipe https://properfoodie.com/cumin-crumbed-tuna-steak/ https://properfoodie.com/cumin-crumbed-tuna-steak/#comments Thu, 04 Jan 2018 14:54:21 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5653 Pan fried tuna steak cooked rare, coated with a cumin and nigella seed crumb and served with paprika cauliflower and crispy kale.  A light and healthy tuna steak recipe perfect for a midweek lunch or a weekend summers evening. Crumbed Tuna Steak For a tuna steak that will wow, I always make a breadcrumb and...

Read More

The post Tuna Steak Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Pan fried tuna steak cooked rare, coated with a cumin and nigella seed crumb and served with paprika cauliflower and crispy kale.  A light and healthy tuna steak recipe perfect for a midweek lunch or a weekend summers evening.

tuna steak recipe

Crumbed Tuna Steak

For a tuna steak that will wow, I always make a breadcrumb and cumin mix to lightly coat the outside of the fish. The breadcrumbs are mixed with cumin and nigella seeds, which are just so fabulous with this fish. Its warm, its slightly spicy, its chocker with Indian flare, and really does bring the best out in this lovely tuna steak.

Is Tuna Steak healthy?

I'm raring to go with my healthy recipes right now and this is a fabulous one! This recipe uses my most favourite fish: the tuna steak, and pairs it with my most favourite carb alternative: paprika cauliflower. There's plenty going on here, from crunchy chickpeas to juicy pomegranate seeds. So I can pretty much guarantee that, flavour wise, this is one healthy option that will not disappoint. Tuna steak is also a fantastic option if you're after a high protein and low fat piece of fish. Like most white fish the tuna steak is a great lean option and compared to most other fish offers the highest amount of protein with 25.2g of protein in every 100g of raw tuna.

However, the good old tuna did have a slight fall from grace at the end of 2018 when it was stripped of its status of being an oily fish. New data from the department of health demonstrated that the levels of omega 3 fatty acid in tuna were lower than that of other oily fish such as salmon and mackerel, and were actually a lot more similar to that of white fish. So if you're trying to increase your intake of oily fish and meet the guidance of two portions of oily fish per week then tuna steak is no longer the answer. For recipes that use oily fish such as salmon have a look at my Asian salmon in a bag recipe, salmon kedgeree and salmon and prawn linguine.

crumbed tuna with cauliflower

Tuna steak recipe ingredients

The ingredients you will need to make this recipe are:

For the cauliflower:

  • 400g cauliflower chopped
  • 210g tin of chickpeas
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 0.5 teaspoon cayenne pepper
  • 0.5 teaspoon turmeric
  • Half a pomegranate

For the tahini dip:

  • 1 tablespoon fat free greek style yogurt
  • 1 teaspoon tahini paste
  • 0.5 teaspoon dijon mustard
  • squeeze of a lemon
  • pinch of sea salt

For the tuna:

  • 2 tuna steaks
  • 1 teaspoon cumin seeds
  • 1 teaspoon nigella seeds
  • 2 tablespoon breadcrumbs
  • 1 egg whisked
  • 0.5 tablespoon olive oil

For the kale:

  • 100g kale
  • drizzle of olive oil

tuna with paprika cauli and chickpeas

Tuna steak seasoning

This recipe uses 1tsp of nigella seed and 1tsp of cumin to season the steaks.  Line up 2 bowls, place the egg in one and whisk, then place the cumin seeds, nigella seeds and breadcrumbs in the second. Dip and coat the tuna in the egg and then dip and coat in the breadcrumb mix.

A splash of colour really helps bring a recipe to life and in this tuna steak recipe I love to add some bright pink pomegranate seeds.

cumin and nigella tuna steak

Is it safe to eat rare tuna steak?

Tuna is perfectly safe to eat rare, if tuna is overcooked it becomes dry and chewy.  Tuna has a meaty texture as opposed to the flaky texture usually associated with fish. When cooking tuna it is recommended to treat it like a steak and cook it on a high heat for a very short time to keep the centre of the fish pink and juicy. Tuna can also be enjoyed completely raw, like in sushi rolls.

cumin and nigella tuna steak

What should I serve with tuna steaks?

Tuna steak goes great with foil pack potatoes or if you are looking for something a little lighter how about a roasted cauliflower salad or mango avocado salad.

Before delving into the recipe I just need to mention this crazy good tahini dip - its the perfect accompaniment to the tuna steak and the tahini flavour is a perfect match to the Indian spices and seeds. As this is quite a dry dish I highly recommend you make this dip to go along with it 🙂

🍖 Other steak recipes

2 of 5 fruit and veg a day recipe30 minutes to produce recipegood fats recipeunder 500 kcal recipe

📖 Recipe

tuna with paprika cauli and chickpeas
Print

Cumin Crumbed Tuna Steak with Paprika Cauliflower & Crispy Kale

Pan fried tuna steak coated with a cumin and nigella seed crumb and served with paprika cauliflower and crispy kale
Course Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine British
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 People
Calories 458kcal

Ingredients

For the cauliflower:

  • 400 g cauliflower chopped
  • 210 g tin of chickpeas
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 0.5 teaspoon cayenne pepper
  • 0.5 teaspoon turmeric
  • Half a pomegranate

For the tahini dip:

  • 1 tablespoon fat free greek style yogurt
  • 1 teaspoon tahini paste
  • 0.5 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • Squeeze of lemon juice
  • Pinch of sea salt

For the tuna:

  • 2 Tuna Steaks
  • 1 teaspoon cumin seeds
  • 1 teaspoon nigella seeds
  • 2 tablespoon breadcrumbs
  • 1 egg whisked
  • 0.5 tbsp. olive oil

For the kale:

  • 100 g kale
  • Drizzle of olive oil

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 180 degrees C and have a baking tray ready.

Prepare the cauliflower:

  • Add the chopped cauliflower and chickpeas to a large bowl. Mix in the oil, paprika, cayenne pepper and turmeric. Transfer to the baking tray and roast in the oven for 20 minutes.

Prepare the dip:

  • In a small bowl mix together the yogurt, tahini, mustard, lemon juice and salt. Transfer to a small serving dish and place to one side.

Prepare the coating:

  • Line up 2 bowls, place the egg in one and whisk, then place the cumin seeds, nigella seeds and breadcrumbs in the second. Dip and coat the tuna in the egg and then dip and coat in the breadcrumb mix. Set on a plate to one side.

Prepare the Kale:

  • Remove any tough stems from the kale and roughly chop the leaves. Cook the kale with a drizzle of oil in large wok or frying pan for at least 5 minutes, then transfer to the serving plate.

Cook the tuna:

  • Heat half tablespoon of oil in a griddle pan. When pan is pipping hot carefully place in the tuna. Cook for 1 minute on each side then transfer to a chopping board and slice. Take the cauliflower out of the oven and serve alongside the kale, then top with the tuna and pomegranate seeds. (Use a rolling pin to bash the back of the pomegranate half and dislodge the seeds). Add a dollop of tahini dip and enjoy.

Nutrition

Calories: 458kcal | Fat: 21g

PIN FOR LATER

cumin & nigella crumbed tuna with paprika cauli and crispy kale

The post Tuna Steak Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/cumin-crumbed-tuna-steak/feed/ 6
Pea Pasta https://properfoodie.com/pea-pasta/ https://properfoodie.com/pea-pasta/#comments Sun, 16 Sep 2018 17:41:15 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=7521 Pea pasta is a simple summer spaghetti tossed in pea pesto and served with freshly grated parmesan and basil leaves. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 🥗 Peas I do love peas - they are such an easy veg to cook with. The fact that they store so easily and cook up so quickly, means that its rare to ever be...

Read More

The post Pea Pasta appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Pea pasta is a simple summer spaghetti tossed in pea pesto and served with freshly grated parmesan and basil leaves.

pea pasta made with a cream pea pesto served on a plate with pasta being lifted with fork

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥗 Peas

I do love peas - they are such an easy veg to cook with. The fact that they store so easily and cook up so quickly, means that its rare to ever be with out some green veggies for the side of our plates.

But every now and again I do like to make the little pea the star of the show like in this gorgeous pea pesto pasta. Pea soup is another great way to show off the humble pea. Its usually best when paired with a salty ingredient like in pea and ham soup or pea and samphire soup - so full of goodness and flavour 🙂

pea pasta made with spaghetti and a basil and pea pesto served up on 3 plates with extra parmesan and pesto at the side

🍜 Pasta with a pea puree pesto

We usually have a glut of peas up at the allotment in the summer and pea soup isn't necessarily the best option when the weather is warm (although pea soup is also great served cold!). However, another great recipe option for the wonderful petit pois, instead of soup, is pea pasta made with a creamy pea pesto.

To make the pea pesto I simply pureed peas with garlic, fresh basil and some grated parmesan. This is a perfect sauce for stirring through some al dente spaghetti to create this a lovely vibrant dish of green pea pasta. The perfect dish for those long summer evenings. For a pasta dish thats a little more traditional but still has that summer vibe, try my salmon and prawn linguine.

Summer pea pasta with pea puree piled onto a plate

🥘 What you will need to make this recipe

Full ingredients & recipe instructions in recipe card below: JUMP TO RECIPE

To make pea pesto pasta for 4 people you will need the following ingredients

For the pasta:

  • 350 g dried spaghetti
  • 200 ml Boiling water
  • 1 tsp salt for the water

For the pea pesto:

  • ½ tbsp olive oil
  • 150 g Onion roughly chopped
  • 2 cloves of garlic finely chopped
  • 400 ml of boiling water
  • 400 g of frozen peas or 500g fresh podded peas (300g with pods removed)
  • Handful fresh basil leaves
  • 15 g grated Parmesan (or vegetarian cheese for a veggie option)
  • Pinch of Sea salt and black pepper
  • Extra basil leaves, parmesan and olive oil to serve (optional)

🔪 Instructions

  1. Cook the spaghetti or preferred type of pasta in salted water and according to the packet instructions.
  2. Whilst the spaghetti is cooking place a large pan on a medium heat. Add the oil, chopped onions and garlic then fry until soft. Next pour in the boiling water and add the peas. Bring to the boil and simmer for 2 minutes. Remove from the heat and stir in the basil.
  3. Blend the onion and pea mixture whilst still in the pan using a hand blender or transfer to a blender machine. Blend until smooth. Next add the grated parmesan, salt and pepper and mix in well.
  4. Drain the cooked pasta and transfer to the pea pesto. Toss together well then serve with extra parmesan, basil leaves and a drizzle of oil.
pea pesto pasta

📖 Pesto recipes

Making pesto at home is super easy and you can even experiment with the ingredients to come up with your own favourite pesto recipe and then mix with pasta for a super quick evening meal. In general a standard basil pesto usual contains a cheese (usually parmesan), a nut (usually pine nuts), and a veg or fresh herb (usually basil).

In this pea pasta recipe I have replaced the basil with peas and left out the nuts. Another idea is to use celery like in this celery, apple and walnut pesto. Of course, there is also plenty of jarred pesto options available in the supermarkets, which is really handy for midweek dinners. I usually have a jar in the cupboard ready for making chicken and broccoli with pesto quinoa or for a simple chicken pesto pasta.

⏲️ Cooking time

Meals that take an age to prepare and cook are just not practical during the week. From pod to plate this pea pasta recipe takes just 30 minutes to make. To make it even more efficient the pea pesto can be prepared in advance (refrigerate or freeze!).

💭 Recipe tip

Save some of your pasta cooking water. Then, if you find that your pea pesto is too thick to evenly toss through the cooked pasta, add a couple of ladles of the pasta water to help loosen and combine. The starch in the water, left over from the pasta, will also ensure that the pesto doesn't become too watery.

Let me know what you think of this pea pesto pasta recipe by leaving and comment and rating below! You can also save pea pesto pasta on Pinterest: pea pesto pasta.

 under 500 kcal recipe30 minutes to produce recipe1 of 5 a day in this recipe

📖 Recipe

summer spaghetti with peas and parmesan
Print

📋 Pea Pasta

Simple summer spaghetti tossed in pea puree pesto and served with freshly grated parmesan and basil leaves
Course Main Course
Cuisine British, Italian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 412kcal

Ingredients

For the spaghetti:

  • 350 g dried spaghetti
  • 200 ml Boiling water
  • 1 teaspoon salt for the water

For the pea purée:

  • ½ tablespoon olive oil
  • 150 g Onion roughly chopped
  • 2 cloves of garlic finely chopped
  • 400 ml of boiling water
  • 400 g of frozen peas or 500g fresh podded peas (300g with pods removed)
  • Handful fresh basil leaves
  • 15 g grated Parmesan (or vegetarian cheese for a veggie option)
  • Pinch of Sea salt and black pepper

To serve:

  • Extra fresh basil leaves, Parmesan and olive oil

Instructions

  • Start by cooking the spaghetti in salted water and according to the packet instructions.
  • Whilst the spaghetti is cooking place a large pan on a medium heat. Add the oil, chopped onions and garlic then fry until soft. Next pour in the boiling water and add the peas. Bring to the boil and simmer for 2 minutes. Remove from the heat and stir in the basil.
  • Blend the onion and pea mixture whilst still in the pan using a hand blender or transfer to a blender machine. Blend until smooth. Next add the grated parmesan, salt and pepper and mix in well.
  • Drain the cooked spaghetti and transfer to the pea puree. Toss together well then serve with extra parmesan, basil leaves and a drizzle of oil.

Notes

Recipe tip: 
Save some of your pasta cooking water. Then, if you find that your pesto is too thick to evenly toss through the cooked pasta, add a couple of ladles of the pasta water to help loosen and combine. The starch in the water, left over from the pasta, will also ensure that the pesto doesn't become too watery.
nutritional info pea pasta

Nutrition

Serving: 333g | Calories: 412kcal | Carbohydrates: 80.1g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 4.8g | Saturated Fat: 1.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1.6g | Sodium: 80mg | Potassium: 441.8mg | Fiber: 6.1g | Sugar: 9.9g | Vitamin A: 19.6IU | Vitamin C: 23.5mg | Calcium: 108.8mg | Iron: 3.4mg

The post Pea Pasta appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/pea-pasta/feed/ 7
Frozen salmon and potato traybake https://properfoodie.com/frozen-salmon-potato-traybake/ https://properfoodie.com/frozen-salmon-potato-traybake/#respond Tue, 13 Nov 2018 22:31:24 +0000 https://www.properfoodie.com/?p=7997 Feed the family for just £5.12 with this frozen salmon traybake. A simple and affordable oily fish meal, made on one tray, with minimal preparation, but maximum taste. An easy and healthy way to fit in those all important omega-3 fatty acids The best salmon recipe on a budget Keeping up with eating the right...

Read More

The post Frozen salmon and potato traybake appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Feed the family for just £5.12 with this frozen salmon traybake. A simple and affordable oily fish meal, made on one tray, with minimal preparation, but maximum taste. An easy and healthy way to fit in those all important omega-3 fatty acids

Frozen Salmon and potato traybake feed four for a fiver

The best salmon recipe on a budget

Keeping up with eating the right amounts of fish and getting in that all important portion of oily fish each week, can be hard going. Particularly when oily fish favourites such as salmon and trout can be quite pricey. Four fresh fillets of salmon usually come in at around £8 or £9 and so feeding a family of 4 for a fiver is already well out of reach after the purchase of just one ingredient.

So how to get around this? . . .Frozen Salmon!! Its less than half the price but doesn't mean theres any compromise on taste, quality or sustainability.

Frozen Salmon and potato traybake feed four for a fiver

Is frozen salmon still good for you?

Frozen salmon is flash frozen, meaning that the goodness and quality is locked in immediately after being caught. Salmon is highly valued in our diet due to its high content of omega-3 and protein. Both of which will be just as present and available in frozen salmon. Most frozen fish will keep well in the freezer for four months and will cook up with the same taste and texture as fresh fillets. When purchasing salmon or any kind of fish, fresh or frozen, try to go for fish that is approved by the Marine Stewardship Council (MSC). The blue MSC label will be displayed on the packets of fish that are certified as sustainable. Choosing fish with the blue label means you will be helping to protect oceans, and livelihoods and also help ensure that future generations can enjoy wild seafood.

For this recipe I purchased four Frozen Wild Alaskan salmon fillets (MSC approved) (£3.70), which are caught in the wild and consume a natural diet.

Frozen Salmon and potato traybake feed four for a fiver

Is it safe to cook salmon from frozen?

Its perfectly safe to cook salmon from frozen, as long as the fish is cooked all the way through - just as with fresh salmon. To ensure the frozen salmon is cooked but not over done, I set my oven to a high temperature (200 degrees fan) and drizzle the frozen fillets with oil.

How long does it take to cook frozen salmon?

Frozen salmon or any kind of frozen fish requires a few extra minutes to cook on top of the time required for fresh fish. In this recipe the salmon is cooked through in around 25 minutes. However, you can check it after 20 minutes - the salmon is usually done when it flakes easily with a fork.

Frozen Salmon and potato traybake feed four for a fiver

What is a good vegetable to go with salmon?

I love all kind of veggies with my salmon but I tend to find that ingredients like onion, spring onion and leeks provide an excellent base for the mild, delicate flavour of salmon. In this recipe its really easy to prepare and bake the onions alongside the fish and this is also the case if baking fresh salmon in a bag or foil. Baked potatoes make for an easy traybake when it comes to salmon but I do also love to serve my salmon with rice, or in a kedgeree, as fishcakes, in salmon pasta, salmon and prawn linguine or even in a fish pie. Theres so many options when it comes to fish and salmon - I do hope you find a few of these recipes helpful (and tasty!). 

1 hour to makeunder 500 calories recipefeed 4 for a fiver1 of 5 a day recipehigh in omega 3 recipe

📖 Recipe

Frozen Salmon and potato traybake feed four for a fiver
Print

Feed 4 for a fiver: Frozen Salmon and Potato Traybake

Feed the family for just £5.12 with this frozen salmon traybake. A simple and affordable oily fish meal, made on one tray, with minimal preparation, but maximum taste. An easy and healthy way to fit in those all important omega-3 fatty acids.
Course Dinner, fish, Main Course
Cuisine British
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 309kcal

Ingredients

  • 650 g Large potatoes
  • ½ tablespoon olive oil
  • 330 g Pack of 4 Frozen Wild Alaskan Salmon Fillets
  • 250 g onions
  • 65 g spring onions
  • ½ Juice of a lemon

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 200 degrees C (Fan)
  • Chop the potatoes into 1cm cubed (skins on). Spread the cubed potatoes on a baking tray then drizzle with olive oil and season with salt and black pepper. Agitate and toss gently to fully coat all potatoes in the oil. Place the potatoes into the pre heated oven and bake for 20 minutes.
  • Whilst the potatoes are in the oven prepare the onions by slicing the red onion and chopping the spring onions, on the diagonal, into cm pieces.
  • After 20 minutes remove the potatoes from the oven, use a spatula to flip and mix to potatoes. Next scatter the chopped red onions and spring onions over the top of the potatoes. Then remove all the packaging from the frozen salmon and nestle each fillet onto the tray in-between the half cooked potatoes and onions.
  • Return the role tray, uncovered, to the oven and bake for a further 25 minutes.
  • After 25 minutes remove from the oven, squeeze over the lemon juice and serve.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 335g | Calories: 309kcal | Carbohydrates: 37.9g | Protein: 22.3g | Fat: 8.6g | Saturated Fat: 1.8g | Sodium: 40mg | Sugar: 6.3g

The post Frozen salmon and potato traybake appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/frozen-salmon-potato-traybake/feed/ 0
Sesame Seed Chicken https://properfoodie.com/sesame-seed-chicken/ https://properfoodie.com/sesame-seed-chicken/#respond Wed, 13 Mar 2019 01:38:46 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9272 Sesame seed chicken; sticky, sweet and slightly spicy served with nutty quinoa and stir fried green vegetables. Its ready in 30 minutes, full of flavour, and so much better and healthier than a Chinese takeaway Sesame chicken An Asian-inspired sesame seed chicken recipe with finger-licking, sticky, sesame chicken sauce and a serving of perfectly cooked...

Read More

The post Sesame Seed Chicken appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Sesame seed chicken; sticky, sweet and slightly spicy served with nutty quinoa and stir fried green vegetables. Its ready in 30 minutes, full of flavour, and so much better and healthier than a Chinese takeaway

sesame chicken recipe with quinoa

Sesame chicken

An Asian-inspired sesame seed chicken recipe with finger-licking, sticky, sesame chicken sauce and a serving of perfectly cooked quinoa and Asian greens. This is week-night dinner in its best form. Its quick, healthy and hits the spot if your craving a Chinese takeaway. Takeaway cravings are a regular occurrence in our house. If its not a creamy Thai green or quick chicken curry we're after then we'll almost certainly want fish and chips or pizza. But all of these recipes can easily be recreated at home for a tasty, healthier alternative that won't leave you feeling guilty and bloated.

homemade sesame seed chicken

What is Chinese sesame chicken?

This well known Chinese restaurant dish is usually made with battered chicken, which is deep fried until nice and crispy and then tossed in a sweet and sticky sesame sauce. Now, as good as that is, its not all that healthy. Also, If i'm going to be perfectly honest, I'm not a massive fan of the batter under the sauce, which turns soggy very quickly.

sesame seed chicken recipe

How do you make sesame chicken healthy?

For a healthier version, the chicken can be tossed in paprika and flour, instead of batter, and then stir fried with a small amount of oil instead of deep frying. Although this doesn't provide the same crispy sesame chicken as the takeaway version, it does give a sweet, peppery flavour to the chicken and cooking on a high heat will provide a slight charred crispiness. Delicious. The best part about this version is no soggy batter when the chicken is tossed in the sesame sauce! Hurray!!

sesame seed chicken with quinoa

What is sesame sauce made of?

The sauce for this sesame seed chicken is a sweet, sticky and savoury sauce made with honey, soy sauce, sesame oil, chilli sauce, rice wine vinegar and garlic granules. The honey in the sesame sauce creates a sticky consistency as it simmers and reduces down during cooking. Many sesame sauce recipes use brown sugar and cornflour for flavour and thickening. But if theres a bit of flour on the chicken initially and if the honey in the sauce is allowed to cook down, then theres really no need for sugar or cornflour.

sesame seed chicken with chop sticks

The below links to Chilli sauce and rice vinegar are an affiliate links – which means that if you click on these links and then purchase a product I’ll get a small commission (at no extra cost to you of course). If you do click through, then thanks for continuing to support my site!

How do you make sesame seed chicken?

  1. First make the sesame seed sauce by mixing together light soy sauce, honey, sesame oil, rice wine vinegar (I used Blue Dragon Rice Vinegar), garlic granules and sweet chilli sauce (I used Linghams Chilli Sauce 280Ml).sesame chicken sauce
  2. In a separate bowl mix together plain flour, paprika, salt and pepper and then toss with cubed chicken pieces.floured sesame chicken
  3. Stir fry the floured chicken in a hot pan until seared all over and just about cooked through, then add the sesame sauce.stir fried chicken with sesame sauce
  4. Simmer on a medium heat until the sesame sauce starts to thicken.sticky sesame chicken
  5. Sprinkle over sesame seeds. Then serve with quinoa or rice and Asian greens (optional)sesame seeds on honey sesame chicken recipe

Sesame seed chicken with quinoa

For a little extra protein I served my sesame chicken with a helping of quinoa. To make the perfect quinoa, cook the quinoa grains in vegetable stock for 15minute, in a small saucepan with the lid on. Use triple the volume of stock to the amount of grains (i.e. if cooking 100g of raw quinoa add 300ml of stock - this does not need to be perfectly accurate and I usually just judge by eye). After 15 minutes remove the pan from the heat and set to one side, leaving the lid on. Let the quinoa rest like this for 10 minutes. This will continue the cooking process without causing the grains to turn to mush and it will also allow any excess stock to soak in. After 10 minutes, remove the lid and fluff the quinoa with a fork before serving.

sesame seed chicken with quinoa and asian green vegetables

How can I thicken my sesame chicken sauce?

The honey in the sauce will reduce down as it cooks and allow the sauce to thicken. If you find the sauce has thicken too much and almost disappeared, add a few splashes of water and cook again on a low heat for a couple of minutes. Add more water and cook again if sauce is still too thick. You will find that as the sauce cools it will thicken even more, so if you don't serve immediately you may find you need to add water and cook again to bring it back to life.

Is sesame seed chicken deep fried?

The usual recipe for sesame chicken involves deep frying battered chicken, however, my version uses just flour and paprika and the chicken is stir fried in a small amount of oil.

Can you reheat Sesame seed chicken?

Yes sesame chicken can be reheated if its cooled properly first and then chilled until needed. To reheat add to a pan with a little water and heat gently until piping hot. You may need to add more water if the sauce is too thick. Refrigerate for up to 2 days.

Can sesame seed chicken be frozen?

Yes, once fully cooled sesame seed chicken can be transferred to a sealable container and frozen for up to 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before reheating in a pan as described above.

 30 minutes to produce recipeunder 500 kcal recipegood fats recipeHigh in protein recipebetter than takeaways recipe

📖 Recipe

sesame seed chicken recipe with quinoa
Print

Sesame Seed Chicken

Sesame seed chicken; sticky, sweet and slightly spicy served with nutty quinoa and stir fried green vegetables. Its ready in 30 minutes, full of flavour, and so much better and healthier than a Chinese takeaway
Course Dinner, Main Course, tea
Cuisine Chinese
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 472.6kcal

Ingredients

For the chicken:

  • 350 g Chicken breast cubed
  • 2 tablespoon plain flour
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • Salt and pepper
  • ½ tablespoon sesame oil to stir fry chicken

For the sesame seed sauce

  • 3 teaspoon light soy sauce
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 1 tablespoon sesame oil
  • 1 tablespoon Sweet chilli sauce (I used Linghams chilli sauce - see link above)
  • Splash of rice wine vinegar (I used Blue Dragon Rice Vinegar - see link above)
  • ½ tablespoon garlic powder or granules
  • 5 g sesame seeds

To serve (optional):

  • 80 g raw quinoa cook in 240ml vegetable stock - see above for how to cook the perfect quinoa
  • Stir fried green vegetables
  • Extra sesame seeds
  • Sliced spring onions

Instructions

For the sesame sauce:

  • In a small bowl mix together the light soy sauce, honey, sesame oil, sweet chilli sauce (I used Linghams Chilli Sauce 280Ml), rice wine vinegar, and garlic granules. Set to one side.
    sesame chicken sauce

For the sesame chicken:

  • In a separate larger bowl mix together plain flour, paprika, salt and pepper and then toss with cubed chicken pieces.
    floured sesame chicken
  • Stir fry the floured chicken in a hot pan with sesame oil until seared all over and just about cooked through.
    stir fried chicken with sesame sauce
  • Next add the sesame sauce to the chicken and simmer on a medium heat until the sesame sauce starts to thicken.
  • Sprinkle over sesame seeds and mix in.
    sesame seeds on honey sesame chicken recipe
  • Then serve with quinoa or rice, Asian greens (optional) and extra sesame seeds for topping.
    sesame seed chicken with quinoa

Video

Notes

Click here to view the traffic light Nutritional info for this recipe
Nutritional info above is for one serving of sesame chicken with a helping of quinoa.

Nutrition

Serving: 414g | Calories: 472.6kcal | Carbohydrates: 40.2g | Protein: 53.9g | Fat: 12.3g | Saturated Fat: 2.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4.7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4.3g | Sodium: 1160mg | Sugar: 9.6g

 

The post Sesame Seed Chicken appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/sesame-seed-chicken/feed/ 0
Italian Chicken Cacciatore https://properfoodie.com/italian-chicken-cacciatore/ https://properfoodie.com/italian-chicken-cacciatore/#comments Sat, 04 May 2019 16:50:54 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1956 Italian chicken cacciatore flavoured with rosemary and olives. A really simple and healthy chicken breast one pot, with all the ingredients of an authentic hunters style stew. Best cooked long and slow either in the oven, slow cooker, pressure cooker, one pot or any other preferred method of slow cooking. Chicken Cacciatore Chicken cacciatore is...

Read More

The post Italian Chicken Cacciatore appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Italian chicken cacciatore flavoured with rosemary and olives. A really simple and healthy chicken breast one pot, with all the ingredients of an authentic hunters style stew. Best cooked long and slow either in the oven, slow cooker, pressure cooker, one pot or any other preferred method of slow cooking.

Italian chicken cacciatore

Chicken Cacciatore

Chicken cacciatore is a proper Italian classic and just like spag bol (ragu), risotto and pizza, its a dish that most British households are happy to adopt. Even in the warmer months this easy chicken cacciatore can be such a delight at the end of the day. It may be a hearty stew but the aromatic and earthy flavours of olives and rosemary means it will fit well with a herbed rice dish or some buttered new potatoes. If it does happen to be freezing outside and blowing a gale - then of course this just has to served with a huge pile of creamy mash potatoes. Either way, you're sorted with a fantastic meal.

Italian Chicken stew

Why is it called chicken cacciatore?

This simple Italian chicken stew goes back to the roots of Italy, when hunters used to make this dish with the basic ingredients they had to hand. In Italian 'cacciatore' means 'hunter' and so this dish is sometimes referred to as hunters chicken stew. Hunters style means to be prepared with onions, tomatoes, mushrooms, herbs and sometimes wine. I'm assuming the 'sometimes' means that wine was added when it was available - so, of course, in my version there is plenty of wine 🙂

What wine goes with chicken cacciatore?

As cacciatore is Italian it would be best to make with an Italian wine. My all time favourite Italian wine is Valpolicella, in particular the valpolicella amarone. Ben and I got married in this region of Italy and had this wine served at our wedding breakfast along with a fantastic amarone risotto. The Valpolicalla classico, ripasso or amarone would work well in this dish due to the robust, rich flavours. However, a full bodied montepulciano or  sangiovese would also work really well. If you don't have an Italian wine to hand then any other full bodied wine will be fine, perhaps try with a malbec or strong merlot.

Chicken stew

What is traditionally served with this dish?

Traditionally an Italian chicken casserole is served with fresh pasta - of course. Usually spaghetti, tagliatelle or fettuccine. However, as mentioned earlier, I tend to go with something that will match the time of year. As we are now heading into summer I like to make this dish with herbed rice, which is long grain and wild rice mixed with sea salt and freshly chopped parsley.

How long will it last in the fridge?

A chicken dish will last 1 to 2 days in the fridge depending on how fresh the chicken was when it was cooked. Chicken cacciatore can also be frozen in a sealed container, but it must be cooled first. Freeze for up to 3 months and thoroughly defrost before heating through until piping hot.

Italian chicken casserole

Serve

Serve this dish with your preferred side and top with fresh parsley. Enjoy!

📖 Recipe

chicken cacciatore
Print

Italian Chicken Cacciatore

Easy Chicken cacciatore, a slow cooked, Italian, red wine chicken stew. With all the ingredients of an authentic hunters style stew.
Course Dinner, evening meal, tea
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 418kcal

Ingredients

For the Chicken Stew:

  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 750 g Chicken breast (4 breast)
  • 2 tablespoon Plain flour
  • 200 g Shallots, peeled and left whole (20 Shallots or small onions)
  • 2 Cloves garlic finely chopped
  • 200 ml Italian full bodied red wine
  • 160 g Baby tomatoes
  • 2 tins chopped tomatoes
  • 2 tablespoon Tomato puree
  • 160 g mushrooms, roughly chopped into quarters
  • 3 Sprigs of fresh rosemary
  • 2 Bay leaves
  • 1 Handful Green and black whole olives, pitted
  • Salt and pepper to season
  • 1 Handful Fresh chopped parsley to garnish

Instructions

  • If slow cooking in the oven, pre-heat the oven to 170 degrees C. Place a casserole dish on the stove top and heat up 2 tablespoon olive oil on a medium heat.
  • Slice the chicken breasts into large chunks (I cut each breast into 3), season with salt and pepper and dust evenly with 2 tablespoon plain flour. When the oil is hot; place the chicken chunks in the casserole dish and fry on each side for around 3-4 minutes, or until golden brown. The flour from the chicken will stick to the base of the dish and begin to turn brown - don't panic - leave this for the moment.
  • Remove the chicken and place in a bowl and set to one side. With the casserole dish still on a medium add the peeled whole shallots and chopped garlic. Add more olive oil if needed. Cook for a minute or so before adding the red wine. The wine should sizzle as it enters the pan and loosen the brown flour from the base. Use a wooden spoon to fully remove all the flour (deglaze).
  • Once the wine has reduced by at least half; add 160g whole baby tomatoes, 2 tins of chopped tomatoes, and 2 tablespoon tomato puree. Mix well and bring to a simmer. 
  • Once simmering add 160g chopped mushrooms, 3 springs of rosemary, 2 bay leaves and a handful of green and black pitted olives. Stir well and simmer for a further minute or so.
  • Next return the pre cooked chicken to the casserole dish and stir in well. Bring to the boil then clamp on a lid and place in the middle of the oven for 50mins - 1hr. Alternatively transfer to a slow cooker and cook on medium for 3 hours.
  • Check the stew after 50 minutes. If it appears ready then taste and season with salt and pepper. 
  • Serve the stew with herbed rice or mash or pasta

Nutrition

Serving: 629g | Calories: 418kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 50.1g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7.6g | Sodium: 720mg | Sugar: 11.8g

The post Italian Chicken Cacciatore appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/italian-chicken-cacciatore/feed/ 1
Lemon Drizzle Cake https://properfoodie.com/lemon-drizzle-cake/ https://properfoodie.com/lemon-drizzle-cake/#respond Sun, 23 Feb 2020 23:17:44 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=12398 Lemon drizzle made from scratch with fresh lemons and an easy to follow cake recipe. A lovely citrus cake thats crumbly, moist and perfect for an afternoon tea or as a celebration or birthday cake. Topped with lemon syrup, lemon icing, fresh mint and lemon zest, this really is the best lemon drizzle cake you'll...

Read More

The post Lemon Drizzle Cake appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Lemon drizzle made from scratch with fresh lemons and an easy to follow cake recipe. A lovely citrus cake thats crumbly, moist and perfect for an afternoon tea or as a celebration or birthday cake. Topped with lemon syrup, lemon icing, fresh mint and lemon zest, this really is the best lemon drizzle cake you'll ever make.

lemon drizzle cake with one piece sliced off at the front and lemons and fresh mint in the background

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

This is a super easy cake recipe that can be in the oven and smelling amazing in next to no time. Much like banana bread, almond carrot cake or even Christmas cake, the secret to a good cake is of course is in the mixing.

💭 Top tips

  • Before making the cake mixture, make sure the butter has been left at room temperature for a couple of hours and is soft.
  • Whip together the butter and sugar until creamy. This can take up to 10 minutes in a stand mixer and even longer if you're mixing by hand. Its so worth it though.
  • Gradually add the the beaten eggs just a bit at a time whilst still mixing the creamed butter and sugar. This usually takes a good 10 minutes. If you add the eggs too quickly the mixture will split.
  • If you're worried too much egg has gone in at any point and the mixture looks like it might split - mix in a couple of tablespoons of the self raising flour. This will bring the mixture back together and allow you to continue to add the eggs.
  • Gently hand fold in the remaining flour and zest with a spatula (don't mix in mechanically) so keeping the mixture fluffy and full of air.
  • Bake the cake in a low oven (160 degrees C / 320 degrees F) and avoid opening the oven door during the first few minutes of baking. Higher temps and opening the door can result in the cake sinking in the middle.
  • Bake for around 45 minutes or until an inserted skewer comes out clean.
  • Use fresh lemon juice and zest for the best lemon flavour. To flavour the cake use the zest from 2 lemons. Then mix together the juice of 2 lemons with 100g of sugar and spoon over whilst the cake is still warm after baking.
  • For extra decoration and lemon flavour make lemon icing by mixing lemon juice with icing sugar and spoon or pipe over your cooled cake.
  • I like also like to add extra toppings of freshly chopped mint leaves and lemon zest.
Lemon drizzle cake with lemon icing being sliced into with a knife

🥘 What you will need to make this recipe

Jump to Recipe

To make a loaf cake (10 slices) you will need the following ingredients:

  • 150g (⅔ cup) Softened butter cut into small cubes
  • 150g (¾ cup) Caster Sugar
  • 3 Eggs beaten
  • 200g (1 ¾ cups) Self raising flour
  • Lemon zest from 2 unwaxed lemons (10g)
  • 2 lemons juiced and 100g (½ cup) Sugar for the drizzle
  • 100g (1 cup) icing sugar and 1 lemon juiced (15ml) for the lemon icing
  • Mint leaves and extra lemon zest to decorate

Reference for cup measurements

Lemon drizzle cake with lemon icing and topped with lemon zest and mint

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by pre heating the oven to 160 degrees C / 320 degrees F. Then prepare the loaf tin by lining with greaseproof paper. Use margarine or butter to help stick the paper to the sides and base of the tinloaf cake tin lined with grease proof paper
  2. Add 150g of softened, cubed butter and 150g caster sugar to a mixing bowl or to your stand mixer/food processor. Cream together the sugar and butter using the beater attachment on the stand mixer. Alternatively use a hand held whisk or food processor.butter and sugar in the stand mixer
  3. Start the mixer off slowly and as the ingredients start to combine take it up to full speed. Then mix for around 10 minutes or until the sugar and butter are creamy.Cream together butter and sugar
  4. Gradually add 3 beaten eggs to the creamed sugar and butter, whilst keeping the mixer on high. (or add a bit of egg and then whisk in by hand before adding the next bit). Adding the egg should be done as slowly as possible and can take at least 10 minutes. TIP: If you add too much egg too quickly the mixture will split and be ruined. To help avoid this you can add 1 or 2 tablespoons of the Self raising flour, ahead of time. So make sure you already have your flour weighed out and if you're worried the mixture might split at any time - add in a bit of the flour and continue to mix.Gradually adding beaten egg to the creamed butter and sugar
  5. After all the egg is combined into the mixture, remove the bowl from the stand mixer. Add the self raising flour (or the remaining flour of you have already used some) and the zest of 2 unwaxed lemons. Use a spatula to gently fold the flour and zest into the mixture. Ensuring that the batter stays light and fluffy.Self raising flour and lemon zest added to cake mixture
  6. Carefully transfer the cake mix to the lined loaf tin and smooth down the top using the spatula.cake mixture transferred to a lined loaf tin
  7. Place the loaf tin in the centre of the pre heated oven and bake for 45 minutes or until a inserted skewer comes out clean. Leave the cake in the tin for the moment.Cake baked for 45 minutes or until skewer comes out clean
  8. In a small bowl mix together the juice of 2 lemons with 100g of caster sugar to form a syrup. Prick the warm cake all over with a small skewer or cocktail stick. Spoon the lemon syrup all over the warm cake allowing some of the syrup to run into the holes. As the cake cools in the tin the syrup will set and crystallise on the outer edge of the cake.spoon over lemon and sugar mixture
  9. Once the cake is cooled slightly and the lemon syrup has set (after 20 minutes or so) remove from the tin and place on a wire rack to continue cooling. Next, mix together the icing sugar and juice of 1 lemon (15ml) to make lemon icing. The lemon icing is an optional step.Sugar and lemon juice mixed together
  10. Drizzle the icing over the cooled lemon drizzle cake. I used a piping bag for this but you can just spoon it over if you prefer. Finally top with freshly chopped mint leaves and extra lemon zestDrizzle cooled cake with lemon icing
Slice of lemon cake on a plate with the rest of the cake in the background

❓ Frequently asked questions

How long will this cake keep?

Lemon drizzle cake will keep well in a sealed container for at least 4 days - sometimes longer.

Best way to store

Lemon drizzle is best stored in an air tight container and to keep it extra fresh you can also wrap in cling film and then in foil.

Can you freeze this cake?

You can freeze lemon drizzle but I recommend you freeze the cooled cake as it is without any lemon syrup or lemon icing added. Upon defrosting the syrup and icing can be added. Freeze for up to 3 months and fully defrost at room temperature over night

How do you add lemon flavour to cake?

The best way to add lemon flavour to a cake is to add the zest of a couple of lemons to the raw cake mix. This allows the lemon flavour to be distributed evenly and then baked with the cake. Using a dry ingredient also means that the consistency of the cake won't be altered. After baking a lemon syrup can be poured over the warm cake for a boost of extra citrus flavour.

Why does my cake sink in the middle?

Lemon drizzle cake tends to sink if its bakes at too high a temperature of if the oven door is opened repeatedly during the first 10 minutes of baking. Bake at 160 degrees C or 320 degrees F and avoid opening the oven door until most of the baking time has passed. You may check that the cake isn't catching on the top after 30 minutes.

🍰 Other baking recipes you might like to try

📖 Recipe

lemon drizzle cake
Print

📋 Lemon Drizzle Cake

Lemon drizzle cake recipe made from scratch with fresh lemons and an easy to follow cake recipe. A lovely citrus cake thats crumbly, moist and perfect for an afternoon tea or as a celebration or birthday cake. Topped with lemon syrup, lemon icing, fresh mint and lemon zest, this really is the best lemon drizzle cake you'll ever make.
Course afternoon tea, Dessert, sweet
Cuisine British
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 1 loaf cake
Calories 273.7kcal

Equipment

  • Loaf tin
  • Greaseproof paper
  • Grater to zest lemons
  • Stand mixer or handheld mechanical whisk
  • Spatula
  • Cooling wire rack
  • Piping bag for lemon icing (optional)

Ingredients

For the lemon cake:

  • 150 g (⅔ cup) Softened butter
  • 150 g (¾ cup) Caster Sugar
  • 3 medium Eggs beaten
  • 200 g (1 ¾ cups) Self raising flour
  • Lemon zest from 2 unwaxed lemons 10g

For the lemon drizzle:

  • 2 lemons juiced
  • 100 g (½ cup) Sugar

To decorate:

  • 100 g (1 cup) icing sugar
  • 1 lemon juiced 15ml
  • Mint leaves and extra lemon zest

Instructions

  • Start by pre heating the oven to 160 degrees C / 320 degrees F. Then prepare the loaf tin by lining with greaseproof paper. Use margarine or butter to help stick the paper to the sides and base of the tin.
  • Add 150g of softened, cubed butter and 150g caster sugar to a mixing bowl or to your stand mixer/food processor.
  • Cream together the sugar and butter using the beater attachment on the stand mixer. Alternatively use a hand held whisk or food processor.
Start the mixer off slowly and as the ingredients start to combine take it up to full speed. Then mix for around 10 minutes or until the sugar and butter are creamy.
  • Gradually add 3 beaten eggs to the creamed sugar and butter, whilst keeping the mixer on high. (or add a bit of egg and then whisk in by hand before adding the next bit). Adding the egg should be done as slowly as possible and can take at least 10 minutes. 

    TIP: If you add too much egg too quickly the mixture will split and be ruined. To help avoid this you can add 1 pr 2 tablespoons of the Self raising flour, ahead of time. So make sure you already have your flour weighed out and if you're worried the mixture might split at any time - add in a bit of the flour and continue to mix. 



  • After all the egg is combined into the mixture, remove the bowl from the stand mixer. Add the self raising flour (or the remaining flour of you have already used some) and the zest of 2 unwaxed lemons.
  • Use a spatula to gently fold the flour and zest into the mixture. Ensuring that the batter stays light and fluffy.



  • Carefully transfer the cake mix to the lined loaf tin and smooth down the top using the spatula.



  • Place the loaf tin in the centre of the pre heated oven and bake for 45 minutes or until a inserted skewer comes out clean. Leave the cake in the tin for the moment.
  • 


In a small bowl mix together the juice of 2 lemons with 100g of caster sugar to form a syrup.
  • Prick the warm cake all over with a small skewer or cocktail stick. Spoon the lemon syrup all over the warm cake allowing some of the syrup to run into the holes. As the cake cools in the tin the syrup will set and crystallise on the outer edge of the cake.



  • Once the cake is cooled slightly and the lemon syrup has set (after 20 minutes or so), remove from the tin and place on a wire rack to continue cooling.
  • Next, mix together the icing sugar and juice of 1 lemon (15ml) to make lemon icing. The lemon icing is an optional step.
 Drizzle the icing over the cooled lemon drizzle cake. I used a piping bag for this but you can just spoon it over if you prefer.
  • Finally top with freshly chopped mint leaves and extra lemon zest.

Video

Notes

How long will this cake keep?
Lemon drizzle cake will keep well in a sealed container for at least 4 days - sometimes longer.
Best way to store
Lemon drizzle is best stored in an air tight container and to keep it extra fresh you can also wrap in cling film and then in foil.
Can you freeze this cake?
You can freeze lemon drizzle but I recommend you freeze the cooled cake as it is without any lemon syrup or lemon icing added. Upon defrosting the syrup and icing can be added. Freeze for up to 3 months and fully defrost at room temperature over night.
How do you add lemon flavour to cake?
The best way to add lemon flavour to a cake is to add the zest of a couple of lemons to the raw cake mix. This allows the lemon flavour to be distributed evenly and then baked with the cake. Using a dry ingredient also means that the consistency of the cake won't be altered. After baking a lemon syrup can be poured over the warm cake for a boost of extra citrus flavour.
Why does my cake sink in the middle?
Lemon drizzle cake tends to sink if its bakes at too high a temperature of if the oven door is opened repeatedly during the first 10 minutes of baking. Bake at 160 degrees C or 320 degrees F and avoid opening the oven door until most of the baking time has passed. You may check that the cake isn't catching on the top after 30 minutes.
 

Nutrition

Serving: 75g | Calories: 273.7kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 2.4g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 8.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3.8g | Sodium: 120mg | Potassium: 43.4mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 36.8g | Vitamin A: 183.1IU | Vitamin C: 3.9mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 0.5mg

The post Lemon Drizzle Cake appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/lemon-drizzle-cake/feed/ 0
Healthy Chicken Wraps https://properfoodie.com/paprika-chicken-wraps/ https://properfoodie.com/paprika-chicken-wraps/#comments Fri, 17 Aug 2018 11:58:07 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=7354 Healthy chicken wraps with paprika chicken and Mexican style side dishes. In this recipe find out how to make these easy and chicken wraps and the best way to season the chicken. Also get the recipes for easy homemade guacamole and mixed bean salad, which can be added to the chicken wraps or served as...

Read More

The post Healthy Chicken Wraps appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Healthy chicken wraps with paprika chicken and Mexican style side dishes. In this recipe find out how to make these easy and chicken wraps and the best way to season the chicken. Also get the recipes for easy homemade guacamole and mixed bean salad, which can be added to the chicken wraps or served as side dishes.

three chicken wraps presented on a long slim board with a bowl of guacamole and a squeezed lime

These easy chicken wraps with Mexican style side dishes are great for a healthy mid week meal. They are quick to make and full of flavour. The wraps are filled with lightly seasoned paprika chicken and lettuce, with the option to add in a delicious three bean salad and simple guacamole recipe. You don't even have to make up the chicken wraps until you're sat at the table. Just serve up the paprika chicken in a big bowl with all the extras at the side, then let everyone fill and make their own.

Ingredients

Full ingredients & instructions in recipe card below: Jump to Recipe Card

To make these wraps for four people you will need the following:

  • 4 Chicken breasts cubed (800g)
  • 2 tsp Paprika
  • 1 tsp Cayenne pepper
  • 1 tsp Ground coriander
  • 2 tsp Honey
  • Pinch of sea salt and pepper
  • 1 tbsp Olive oil
  • Pack of shop bought wraps
  • Lettuce leaves optional
  • Extra lime wedges and fresh coriander leaves to serve
  • Guacamole (homemade or shop bought)

Instructions

To make the paprika chicken

  1. Place the cubed chicken into a mixing bowl. Add the paprika, cayenne pepper, ground coriander, honey, salt and pepper then mix until the chicken is fully coated. 
  2. Heat oil in a frying pan or wok. Add the seasoned chicken and stir fry for 5-7 minutes or until cooked through.
  3. Place the wraps in the microwave for 30 seconds or low oven for 5 minute to slightly warm. 
  4. Then either make up the wraps or serve the chicken in a bowl in the centre of the table along with the wraps, lettuce, lime, coriander and guacamole. Then let everyone make up their own wraps.

How to wrap the chicken wraps

  1. Lay out the wraps. Dollop on a couple of spoonfuls of guacamole and spread down the middle of each wrap. Leave a 2 inch gap at the bottom for folding over.
  2. Place a few torn lettuce leaves over the top of the guacamole.
  3. Next divide the cooked paprika chicken between the wraps, placing the chicken directly on top of the lettuce.
  4. Then roll up the chicken wraps by folding up the bottom edge of the wrap, then bring the right side, then left side over. Secure with a cocktail stick if necessary.
paprika chicken in a wrap with lettuce

Mixed bean salad

If you want to add some extra Mexican flare to your wraps then how about serving up with a delicious mixed bean salad. Add the bean salad to your wrap or serve up as a light and healthy side dish. For the three bean salad you will need the following:

Ingredients:

  • 2 tins of your choice of beans (Borlotti, kidney, black bean, haricot, mixed beans)
  • 1 tin of sweetcorn
  • 2 tsp cider vinegar
  • 2 tbsp Olive Oil
  • Juice of 1 lime
  • 2 tsp Dijon mustard
  • Pinch of sea salt and pepper
  • 30g freshly chopped coriander leaves

Instructions:

  1. Drain the tinned beans and sweetcorn into a sieve then rinse well with tap water. Transfer the beans and sweetcorn to a mixing bowl. 
  2. In a small mug or bowl mix together the cider vinegar, oil, lime juice, Dijon mustard, salt and pepper. 
  3. Pour the dressing over the beans and add the coriander leaves. Mix well. Cover and refrigerate until ready to serve.
three wraps with paprika chicken and a spoonful of guacamole next to them and the edge of a bowl of mixed bean salad just visible

Homemade guacamole

A bit of guacamole really adds to the flavour of these healthy chicken wraps. You can either use shop bought guacamole or if you have the time make up your own. Refreshing but creamy, this simple guacamole recipe is the perfect Mexican partner to this recipe. Made with creamy avocado, tomato and chilli. And it really does just take 5 minutes and theres no need for getting out a blender or anything like that. 

For more recipes that use avocado have a look at my easy avocado recipes collection.

How to serve

My favourite thing about this recipe is that you can serve it up however you want. All the little extra can be served at the side or added to the wraps. Get your wraps fully loaded with guacamole, three bean salad, lettuce, fresh coriander and any other extras you fancy (fresh chillies, grated cheese, sour cream, red onions etc). 

If you're extra hungry why not make burritos by adding rice! For burrito making inspiration have a look at Chicken tinga burritos and beef brisket burritos.

three wraps with chicken and lettuce viewed from above with half a lime squeezed at the side and small bowls of bean salad and guacamole above

Frequently asked questions

Can you make the wraps in advance

The wraps can be made and constructed the day before. Once made wrap each wrap tightly in cling film and store in the fridge. Alternatively you can can make up each component (paprika chicken, three bean salad, guacamole) and store separately in the fridge. The wraps can then be freshly put together when you're ready.

Can the chicken be seasoned differently?

Paprika chicken is just one of many seasoned chicken options. If you prefer just stir fry the chicken as it is for a plain option. Or other seasoning options: lemon juice and tarragon, garlic and rosemary, cumin and caraway, coriander and lime. Or why not try chicken with a jerk seasoning like in this jerk chicken tacos recipe

What else can I serve with the chicken wraps?

Other ingredients or side dishes that go well with this recipe include: rice, cheese, refried beans, black bean rice, tortilla chips, soured cream, hot sauce, jalapenos, salsa, bell peppers, red onions, beetroot hummus, satay sauce.

Is this recipe spicy?

This recipe is very mild in terms of spice. However if you would like to add more heat you could add a teaspoon of chilli powder when stir frying the paprika chicken. Alternatively add, chilli peppers, jalapeños, hot sauce or tabasco to the wraps.

Let me know what you think of this recipe by leaving a comment and star rating below. You can also pin the recipe on pinterest!

 30 minutes to produce recipeHigh protein recipe2 of 5 a day in this recipehigh in nutrients recipe

📖 Recipe

three healthy paprika chicken wraps on a board with a bowl of guacamole in the background
Print

Healthy Chicken Wraps

Healthy chicken wraps with paprika chicken and Mexican style side dishes. In this recipe find out how to make these easy and healthy chicken wraps and the best way to season the chicken. Also get the recipes for easy homemade guacamole and three bean salad, which can be added to the wraps or served as side dishes.
Course Main Course
Cuisine Mexican
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 674kcal

Ingredients

For the paprika chicken

  • 4 Chicken breasts cubed
  • 2 teaspoon Paprika
  • 1 teaspoon Cayenne pepper
  • 1 teaspoon Ground coriander
  • 2 teaspoon Honey
  • Pinch of sea salt and pepper
  • 1 tablespoon Olive oil
  • Pack of shop bought wraps
  • Lettuce leaves optional
  • Extra lime wedges and fresh coriander leaves to serve

For the bean salad

  • 2 tins of your choice of beans (Borlotti, kidney, black bean, haricot, mixed beans)
  • 1 tin of sweetcorn
  • 2 teaspoon cider vinegar
  • 2 tablespoon Olive Oil
  • 1 lime juiced
  • 2 teaspoon dijon mustard
  • Pinch of sea salt and pepper
  • 30 g freshly chopped coriander leaves

Instructions

To make the paprika chicken

  • Place the cubed chicken into a mixing bowl. Add 2 teaspoon paprika, 1 teaspoon cayenne pepper, 1 teaspoon ground coriander, 2 teaspoon honey, salt and pepper then mix until the chicken is fully coated.
  • Place a frying pan or wok on a medium heat and add the oil. Place the seasoned chicken into the frying pan and stir fry for 5-7 minutes or until cooked through.
  • Whilst the chicken is cooking place the wraps in the microwave for 30 seconds or low oven for 5 minute to slightly warm.
  • Then either make up the wraps or serve the chicken in a bowl in the centre of the table along with the wraps, lettuce, guacamole, 3 bean salad, coriander and lime. Then let everyone dig in and make up their own chicken wraps.

How to wrap healthy chicken wraps

  • Lay out the wraps. Dollop on a couple of spoonfuls of guacamole and spread down the middle of each wrap. Leave a 2 inch gap at the bottom for folding over.
  • Place a few torn lettuce leaves over the top of the guacamole.
  • Next divide the cooked paprika chicken between the wraps, placing the chicken directly on top of the lettuce.
  • Then roll up the chicken wraps by folding up the bottom edge of the wrap, then bring the right side, then left side over. Secure with a cocktail stick if necessary.

How to make bean salad

  • Drain the tinned beans and sweetcorn into a sieve then rinse well with tap water. Transfer the beans and sweetcorn to a mixing bowl.
  • In a small mug or bowl mix together 2 teaspoon cider vinegar, 2 tablespoon oil, 1 lime juiced, 2 teaspoon dijon mustard, salt and pepper.
  • Pour the dressing over the beans and add the coriander leaves. Mix well. Cover and refrigerate until ready to serve.

Notes

Can you make the wraps in advance? These wraps can be made and constructed the day before. Once made wrap each wrap tightly in cling film and store in the fridge. Alternatively you can can make up each component (paprika chicken, three bean salad, guacamole) and store separately in the fridge. The wraps can then be freshly put together when you're ready.
Can the chicken be seasoned differently? Paprika chicken is just one of many seasoned chicken options. If you prefer just stir fry the chicken as it is for a plain option. Or other seasoning options: lemon juice and tarragon, garlic and rosemary, cumin and caraway, coriander and lime. Or why not try chicken with jerk seasoning like in this jerk chicken taco recipe
What else can I serve with the chicken wraps? Other ingredients or side dishes that go well with these healthy chicken wraps include: rice, cheese, refried beans, black bean rice, tortilla chips, soured cream, hot sauce, jalapenos, salsa, bell peppers, red onions, beetroot hummus, satay sauce. Also, a bit of guacamole will really add to the flavour of these healthy chicken wraps. You can either use shop bought guacamole or if you have the time make up your own from this simple guacamole recipe.
Is this recipe spicy? These paprika chicken wraps are very mild in terms of spice. However if you would like to add more heat you could add a teaspoon of chilli powder when stir frying the paprika chicken. Alternatively add, chilli peppers, jalapeños, hot sauce or tabasco to the wraps.
nutritional info healthy chicken wraps

Nutrition

Serving: 492g | Calories: 674kcal | Carbohydrates: 54.5g | Protein: 61.7g | Fat: 26.2g | Saturated Fat: 5.7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15.2g | Sodium: 520mg | Potassium: 1617.8mg | Fiber: 4.5g | Sugar: 8.4g | Vitamin A: 257.4IU | Vitamin C: 24.5mg | Calcium: 155.5mg | Iron: 4.9mg

The post Healthy Chicken Wraps appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/paprika-chicken-wraps/feed/ 6
Breakfast on the go (+ Recipe Video) https://properfoodie.com/breakfast-on-the-go/ https://properfoodie.com/breakfast-on-the-go/#respond Wed, 12 Jun 2019 00:01:32 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10484 These three meal prep breakfasts are great for breakfast on the go. I'm always looking for breakfast ideas for eating at work and breakfasts pots like these are a great solution. They all come in at under 300 calories, take minutes to put together, keep well in the fridge overnight, and are full of healthy...

Read More

The post Breakfast on the go (+ Recipe Video) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
These three meal prep breakfasts are great for breakfast on the go. I'm always looking for breakfast ideas for eating at work and breakfasts pots like these are a great solution. They all come in at under 300 calories, take minutes to put together, keep well in the fridge overnight, and are full of healthy nutrients and high in protein.

Breakfast ideas

Breakfast on the go

Breakfast can be such a tricky meal to plan and prepare for. Especially when having to combine breakfast with getting up early, getting ready, and getting to work or school. I either end up going without breakfast or, more likely, end up buying something unhealthy but convincingly necessary when its so early and I feel like I need a pick-me-up.

But given the choice, I would rather have a handy little pot of something tasty and healthy, ready to grab out of the fridge for breakfast on the go or breakfast at my desk. Usually, this type of thing requires substantial time and effort. Despite, good intensions, anything thats of an inconvenience and that needs preparing the night before, will eventually fall by the wayside.

So, in an attempt to have healthy a breakfast on the go that I know I will stick to, I have created three breakfast recipes that can be made in advanced and easily stored in the fridge overnight in a jar or plastic container. These breakfast ideas are so easy that its even possible to prep for 3 days worth without too much bother.

Breakfast recipes

What is healthy to eat for breakfast on the go?

Theres 2 sides to this coin - not only do we want healthy breakfast foods here, but we want food that can be made ahead of time and food that is of course transportable. So first of all, whats healthy? This is the first meal of the day and the meal that will break our overnight fast and so its important that it provides the right kind of nutrients to replenish our stores, boost our energy and awaken our cognitive function. That said, all of this doesn't have to occur first thing in morning and plenty of new evidence is now suggesting that overnight fasting (Intermittent fasting) may be helpful for health and weight control.

So, this is all good news for those of us that get up at 6am and don't feel hungry until a good 3 to 4 hours later. But when I do get those hunger pangs, what should I be reaching for? As with most healthy food advice, a healthy breakfast should be made up of:

  • Fruit and veg
  • Legumes (beans, peas)
  • Wholegrains
  • Lean proteins
  • Healthy fats (nuts, seeds, oily fish, extra virgin olive oil)

These types of food also release energy slowly (low glycemic index) and so may have less impact on blood sugar and can sustain us for longer. Whats more, there are several ingenious ways of combining these types of foods together to create transportable breakfasts on the go.

breakfast meal prep

What can I take to work for breakfast?

The ingredients I like to use, which are healthy and a good choice to take for breakfast on the go include:

  • Fruits (banana, blueberries)
  • Yogurts (Natural, greek style, no added sugars or sweeteners)
  • Nuts and seeds (almonds, walnuts, cashews, sunflower seeds, pumpkin seeds, flax seed, chia seeds)
  • Boiled eggs
  • Smoked salmon/smoked mackerel
  • Wholegrain cereals
  • Porridge
  • Avocado
  • Salads (spinach, rocket, kale)
  • Beans
  • Wholegrain toast
  • Nut butters

Breakfast ideas for work

With this in mind, below are three meal prep breakfast ideas, that are easy to put together and to transport:

Smoked salmon breakfast

  1. Fill half a jar with rocket leaves.
  2. Then top the leaves with pieces of smoked salmon, a wedge of lemon and pieces of feta cheese.smoked salmon breakfast

Beetroot salad recipe

  1. Fill a small jar with cooked beetroot cubes and edamame (soya) beans. You can usually find packets of frozen soya beans in the freezer aisle of most supermarkets. Frozen soya beans defrost in minutes when mixed with a small amount of luke warm water from the kettle.
  2. Top with crumbled feta cheesebeetroot salad with feta
  3. For a quick a simple dressing to pour over the top; mix ½ teaspoon of extra virgin olive oil with ½ teaspoon of apple cider vinegar. I mixed this in a separate small container, ready to pour over the next day.Apple cider dressing

Avocado and eggs

Avocado and eggs is now a classic and I just love it, so I just had to try and fit this in with my working breakfasts:

  1. Boil 2 large eggs in water for 8-9 minutes. Then immediately run the eggs under the cold tap in order to stop the cooking process.
  2. Fill a quarter of a large jar with chopped spinach leaves.
  3. Add half of a chopped avocado, tossed in lime juice. The lime is important to help keep the avocado fresh and stop it from going brown overnight.
  4. Peel the cooled eggs, then slice in half and drop into the top of the jar.Avocado and eggs

To finish, close and seal the jars and put them in the fridge to keep them until you need them. All of these breakfasts will keep well in the fridge for up to 3 days, therefore, you can make a few of these on Sunday to get you through most of the week.

What healthy breakfasts can I eat at home?

Happy breakfasting!

less than 15 minutes to make this recipe under 300 calories recipemeal prep recipeRecipe low in carbsHigh in protein recipe

📖 Recipe

breakfast on the go
Print

Breakfast on the go

These three meal prep breakfasts are great for breakfast on the go. I'm always looking for breakfast ideas for eating at work and breakfasts pots like these are a great solution. They all come in at under 300 calories, take minutes to put together, keep well in the fridge overnight, and are full of healthy nutrients and high in protein.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine British
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 1 person
Calories 291.3kcal

Ingredients

To make the smoked salmon breakfast

  • 30 g Rocket leaves
  • 30 g Smoked salmon
  • A wedge of lemon
  • 30 g Feta cheese

To make the beetroot salad

  • 80 g Cooked beetroot chopped into cubes
  • 40 g Edamame (soybeans
  • 30 g Feta cheese

For the beetroot salad dressing

  • ½ teaspoon Extra virgin olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Apple cider vinegar

To make the avocado and eggs

  • 2 large eggs
  • 30 g Spinach leaves
  • Half an avocado (60g)
  • Juice of half a lime

Instructions

For the smoked salmon breakfast

  • Fill half a jar with rocket leaves.
  • Then top the leaves with pieces of smoked salmon, a wedge of lemon and pieces of feta cheese.

For the beetroot salad

  • Fill a small jar with cooked beetroot cubes and edamame (soybeans. You can usually find packets of frozen soya beans in the freezer aisle of most supermarkets. They defrost in minutes when mixed with a small amount of luke warm water from the kettle.
  • Top with crumbled feta cheese
  • For a quick a simple dressing to pour over the top; mix a teaspoon of extra virgin olive oil with a teaspoon of apple cider vinegar. I mixed this in a separate small container, ready to pour over the next day.

For the avocado and eggs

  • Boil 2 large eggs in water for 8-9 minutes. Then immediately run under the cold tap to stop the cooking process.
  • Fill a quarter of a large jar with chopped spinach leaves.
  • Add half of a chopped avocado, tossed in lime juice. The lime is important to help keep the avocado fresh and stop it from going brown overnight.
  • Peel the cooled eggs, then slice in half and drop into the top of the jar.

Storage

  • Seal up your jars and pop them in the fridge until you need them. All of these breakfasts will keep well in the fridge for up to 3 days.

Video

Notes

Above nutritional info is for one jar of the avocado and eggs breakfast. Nutritional info for all recipes can be found in the below links
Smoked salmon breakfast - nutritional info
beetroot and feta breakfast pot - nutritional info
avocado and eggs breakfast pot - nutritional info

Nutrition

Serving: 220g | Calories: 291.3kcal | Carbohydrates: 1.4g | Protein: 18.9g | Fat: 23.4g | Saturated Fat: 5.7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11.7g | Sodium: 200mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 0.5g

PIN FOR LATER

Breakfast on the go. Fuss free easy to make breakfast pots for busy mornings

The post Breakfast on the go (+ Recipe Video) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/breakfast-on-the-go/feed/ 0
Honey and Lemon Tea https://properfoodie.com/warm-water-with-lemon-and-honey/ https://properfoodie.com/warm-water-with-lemon-and-honey/#respond Fri, 08 Jan 2021 16:40:36 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=8251 HONEY AND LEMON TEA RECIPE. AD FEATURE FOR SILVER MUSHROOM. Steamy honey and lemon tea with sliced lemon and fresh thyme. Make this rejuvenating hot toddy in just 10 minutes to give you a boost during those cold winter days. Arguably one of the best remedies for a cold, filled with plenty of vitamins and a...

Read More

The post Honey and Lemon Tea appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

HONEY AND LEMON TEA RECIPE. AD FEATURE FOR SILVER MUSHROOM.

Steamy honey and lemon tea with sliced lemon and fresh thyme. Make this rejuvenating hot toddy in just 10 minutes to give you a boost during those cold winter days. Arguably one of the best remedies for a cold, filled with plenty of vitamins and a nice boost of sugar. Especially good when infused with some fragrant thyme and a tiny pinch of salt.

Honey and lemon tea in a glass tea cup viewed from above.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

The festive period is rife with alcohol. Every trip, every special day, every visit to a friends house.... it can very quickly get out of hand. With this in mind its always nice to have an alternative non alcoholic option or a soothing recovery drink.

Honey and lemon tea is a great option for a virgin hot toddy. Its also sweetened with natural sugar, provides a tangy boost of vitamin C from the lemon juice and is full of goodness from all the health benefits of honey. I also like to add in the juice from oranges and limes, the more citrusy the better! And of course its great to have a healthy boost of vitamins and other essential nutrients.

🍽 Equipment notes

Useful bits of equipment for making this recipe:

🥘 Ingredients

To make this virgin hot toddy you will need:

A display of all the ingredients needed to make honey and lemon tea with text overlay labelling each ingredient.

Ingredient notes

Juices: Lemon juice is the main ingredients required for the recipe. Orange juice brings sweetness and lime juice brings sour so you can flavour to your taste.

Honey: Honey is essential for balancing out the sour lemon flavour and is the main medicinal agent bringing its soothing effects.

Salt: Only the tiniest pinch of salt is needed in this drink. Its only really necessary if you are feeling particularly rough, run down and in need of a sodium boost. If not you may prefer to leave this out.

Thyme: Purely for aromatic flavour.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. In a tea cup or mug add the 3 juices and stir in a tablespoon of honey.
  2. Next add the sliced lemon, lime and orange and sprinkle in a tiny pinch of salt and some fresh thyme.
  3. Top up with hot water.
  4. Stir well to fully dissolve the honey and salt. Four images showing how to make Honey tea in stages.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Does honey and warm water with lemon cure a cold?

Although this lovely beverage can be helpful to soothe a sore throat or loosen congestion, it unfortunately isn't a magic remedy and probably won't release you from the relinquishing grips of a nasty cold. However, the NHS does now recommend warm water with lemon and honey to treat coughs, rather than over the counter cough medicine!! Very useful to know!!

Does lemon and warm water aid weight loss?

Drinking warm water is a great way to keep warm in the winter and stave off hunger pangs. So although not directly related to weight loss, this lovely beverage may aid you in a weight loss journey, by keeping you fuller for longer and ensuring your digestive system has had plenty of time to digest the previous meal before you eat again.

What are the benefits of drinking honey and lemon tea?

The combination of lemon and honey is particularly good for easing the symptoms of a cold. The lemon can help loosen congestion and honey can soothe a sore throat. This citrus tea will also provide a nice boost of vitamin C to help the immune system. In addition good quality honey contains antioxidants which have been linked to reducing the risks of strokes, heart disease and some cancers.

Steamy cup of lemon tea in a glass teacup sat on a bronze mottled tray.

☕ Other hot drink recipes

🍋 Other recipes that use lemon

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Honey and lemon tea in a glass tea cup viewed from above.
Print

Honey And Lemon Tea

Steamy honey and lemon tea with sliced lemon and fresh thyme. Make this rejuvenating hot toddy in just 10 minutes to give you a boost during those cold winter days. Arguably one of the best remedies for a cold, filled with plenty of vitamins and a nice boost of sugar. Especially good when diffused with some fragrant thyme and a tiny pinch of salt.
Course beverage
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 1 cup or mug
Calories 75kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ a large orange juiced
  • Squeeze of lime juice
  • ½ a lemon juiced
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • Tiny pinch of sea salt
  • Slices of lemon lime and orange
  • Few sprigs of fresh thyme leaves
  • Hot water to top up

Instructions

  • In a tea cup or mug add the 3 juices and stir in a tablespoon of honey.
  • Next add the sliced lemon, lime and orange and sprinkle in a tiny pinch of salt and some fresh thyme.
  • Top up with hot water.
  • Stir well to fully dissolve the honey and salt.

Notes

Ingredient notes:
Juices: Lemon juice is the main ingredients required for the recipe. Orange and lime are optional. Orange juice brings sweetness and lime juice brings sour so you can flavour to your taste.
Honey: Honey is essential for balancing out the sour lemon flavour and is the main medicinal agent bringing its soothing effects.
Salt: Only the tiniest pinch of salt is needed in this drink. Its only really necessary if you are feeling particularly rough, run down and in need of a sodium boost. If not you may prefer to leave this out.
Thyme: Purely for aromatic flavour.
Does honey and warm water with lemon cure a cold?
Although this lovely beverage can be helpful to soothe a sore throat and loosen congestion, it unfortunately isn't a magic remedy and probably won't release you from the relinquishing grips of a nasty cold. However, the NHS does now recommend warm water with lemon and honey to treat coughs, rather than over the counter cough medicine!! Very useful to know!!
What are the benefits of drinking honey and lemon tea?
The combination of lemon and honey is particularly good if you have a cold. The lemon can help loosen congestion and honey can soothe a sore throat. This citrus tea will also provide a nice boost of vitamin C to help the immune system. In addition good quality honey contains antioxidants which have been linked to reducing the risks of strokes, heart disease and some cancers.

Nutrition

Serving: 250ml | Calories: 75kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 205mg | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin C: 14mg

This post was first published in December 2018. Updated in January 2021 with an improved recipe and new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post Honey and Lemon Tea appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/warm-water-with-lemon-and-honey/feed/ 0